1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2007
Safety 11
Security 47
9-3 Convertible 61
Instruments and controls
81
Interior equipment 117
Starting and driving 149
Car care 201
Customer Assistance and Information 273
Technical data 279
Index 299
© Saab Automobile AB 2006
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instrument panel
Fuel gauge __________________
Odometer and trip meter________
Speedometer ________________
Tachometer __________________
Temperature gauge____________
Turbo gauge _________________
Warning and indicator lights _____
Saab Information Display (SID)___
89
90
87
87
88
88
82
89
Cruise Control___________ 169
Direction indicators _______ 100
High/low beam control stalk
98
Replacing wiper blades ___ 217
Washers and wipers______ 101
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Changing bulbs__________ 219
Front fog lights___________ 99
Headlight levelling________ 97
High/low beam __________ 98
Parking lights____________ 97
Rear fog light____________ 99
Automatic climate control __ 106
Car care and maintenance_ 268
Hazard warning lights_____ 100
Seat heating, ACC _______ 113
Ashtray _____________________ 134
Cigarette lighter _______________ 134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Exterior
Maximum loads _______________ 280
Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 192
Roof load ____________________ 192
Hood _______________________ 202
Washing the engine bay_________ 261
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 265
Body __________________ 264
Service program _________ 274
Moonroof_______________ 128
Touching up paintwork ____ 264
Washing _______________ 261
Waxing and polishing _____ 264
Changing bulbs _________ 219
Dipswitch ______________
97
Direction indicators_______ 100
Front lights _____________ 221
Headlight levelling (xenon) _
Headlight switches _______
97
97
Headlight washers _______ 218
Brake lights _____________ 227
Changing bulbs__________ 219
Light switches ___________ 97
Taillights _______________ 227
Central locking __________
Child safety locks ________
Lock buttons____________
Trunk lock______________
48
52
48
51
Folding down the rear seat _ 136
Lighting ________________ 227
Load-through hatch_______ 138
Spare wheel ____________ 140
Tools __________________ 140
Trunk__________________ 136
Braking _____________________ 170
Changing wheels______________ 257
Spare wheel _________________ 254
Tire pressure ________________ 292
Tires _______________________ 241
Wheels _____________________ 290
Winter driving ________________ 185
Economical motoring _____ 183
Fuel filler door __________ 157
Fuel gauge _____________
89
Fuel grade _____________ 285
Refueling ______________ 157
Towing_________________ 195
Towing hook eyes ________ 195
Towing a trailer __________ 188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Interior
Interior rearview mirror _________ 123
Vanity mirror _________________ 132
Door mirrors__________________ 122
Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 232
Interior light switches ___________ 131
Moonroof ____________________ 128
Airbag _________________ 32
Steering wheel adjustment _ 118
Steering _______________ 288
Airbag_________________
Child safety locks ________
Child seats _____________
Safety belt care _________ 260
Safety belts ____________ 12
32
52
24
Fuses _________________ 234
Electric windows _________ 119
Glove box ______________ 134
Storage compartments____ 134
Automatic transmission ___ 163
Changing gears _________ 162
Manual transmission _____ 162
Child seats ________________
Folding down the rear seat ____
Rear seat__________________
Safety belts ________________
Seat adjustment ____________
Seat heating _______________
Upholstery care_____________
24
136
136
12
18
113
260
Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 134
Break-In Period _______________ 161
Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 185
Ignition switch ________________ 150
Parking brake_________________ 177
Parking _____________________ 177
Starting the engine ____________ 152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Engine bay, 4-cyl
Engine: description ____________ 202
Engine: technical data __________ 283
Important considerations for driving 154
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 284
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 209
Driving in hot climates __________ 187
Radiator_____________________ 283
Temperature gauge ____________
88
Color code______________ 293
Engine number __________ 293
Gearbox number _________ 293
ABS brakes_____________ 170
Brake pads _____________ 211
Brake system ___________ 289
Brake fluid______________ 211
Warning labels __________
8
Vehicle identification number 293
Alternator_______________ 216
Drive belt _______________ 216
Exhaust emission control __ 155
Ignition system __________ 286
Simple troubleshooting (ACC) 268
Spark plugs _____________ 286
Turbo gauge ____________ 88
Changing a fuse_________ 234
Fuse table _____________ 239
Fuses _________________ 234
Relays ________________ 239
Topping-up fluid _________ 218
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 101
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Washer jets ____________ 218
Engine oil: checking level __ 207
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Transmission: technical data _____ 287
Manual transmission ___________ 162
Power steering________________ 212
Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 212
Battery ______________________ 213
Battery charge ________________ 213
Jump starting _________________ 198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Engine bay, 2.8 V6
Engine: description ____________ 202
Engine oil: topping up __________ 207
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 284
Engine: technical data __________ 283
Important considerations
Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 283
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 209
Driving in hot climates __________ 187
Temperature gauge ____________
88
for driving ___________________ 154
Power steering___________ 212
Fluid: checking/topping up__ 212
ABS brakes_____________ 171
Brake pads _____________ 289
Brake system ___________ 170
Brake fluid______________ 211
Vehicle identification
number________________ 293
Colour code_____________ 293
Engine number __________ 293
Warning labels___________
Gearbox number _________ 293
8
Changing a fuse _________ 236
Fuses _________________ 234
Relays ________________ 239
Fuse table______________ 236
Exhaust emission control __ 155
Drive belt _______________ 216
Simple troubleshooting (ACC) 268
Alternator_______________ 216
Turbo gauge ____________ 88
Spark plugs _____________ 286
Ignition system __________ 286
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 101
Topping-up fluid _________ 218
Washer jets_____________ 218
Washer fluid ____________ 218
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Manual gearbox_______________ 162
Gearbox: technical data_________ 287
Engine oil: checking level________ 207
Battery ______________________ 213
Battery charge ________________ 213
Jump starting _________________ 198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Warning labels
Radiator fan:
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
A/C system:
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-
ual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 680 g R134a.
Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
LEVEL INDICATOR
DARK OK
CLEAR
LOW
P/N 127 93 955
Maintenance Free
12V 60Ah 580A (EN)
Battery:
• No sparks, flames or smoking
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
CANADA
NETTOYERLEBOUCHON
DE REMPLISSAGE
AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
UTILISER SEULEMENT
DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-
ENANT D’UN CONTE-
NANT SCELLÉ.
• NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
• SHIELD EYES
• KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
• ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• EXPLOSIVE GAS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Jack
• Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
tire snow chains.
• Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
and level ground.
• Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTION
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
changed.
3 Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
one-half turn.
5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
wheel is not loose.
EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS
• Children can be killed or serious injured by the air bag.
• The back seat is the safest place for children.
• Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
• Always use seat belts and child restraints.
7 Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
Changing wheels:
This label is only found on
cars with xenon headlights.
Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Example of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks,
Windshield
wipers
Coolant tem-
perature
flames or
smoking
Buckle up
Airbag
Headlights
Radiator fan
Fuel
Refer to
the Owner’s
Manual
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
No charge to
battery
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat
Shield eyes
Parking lights
Defroster
Foot brake
Keep out of
reach of
children
Electric
windows
Hazard warn-
ing lights
Rear window
heating
Coolant level
Battery acid
contains sul-
phuric acid
Deactivating
ofrearwindow
switches
Front fog
lights
Engine oil
pressure
Cabin fan
Risk of
explosive gas
Central
locking, lock
Rear fog light
ABS brakes
Central
locking,
unlock
Electronic
Stability
Program
Trunk lid,
opening
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
11
Safety
Safety belts ___________
12
18
23
24
32
Seats ________________
Head restraints ________
Child safety ___________
Airbag________________
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Safety
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
Safety belts
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
WARNING
• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the safety
belt reminder will come on if the driver or/
and the front seat passenger has not buck-
led up.
• Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all occupants.
• Child safety, see page 24.
• Check that the locking tongue is prop-
erly locked in the belt lock.
The reminder for the driver is in the main
instrument and for the front seat passenger
on the instrument panel.
Driver seat safety belt reminder
• In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
passenger not wearing a safety belt
will be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
Thereminderforthedriverhasanadditional
audible signal which sounds for 6 seconds,
or until the driver fastens his belt.
The following applies to the both front
seats: If the belt is not fastened before the
car starts to move there will be an additional
reminder when the speed exceeds 15 mph.
The text Use your seatbelt. is lit on the
Saab Information Display (SID) and the
symbol will flash.
If the belt is not fastened then an audible
signal will come on after 30 seconds.
The text in the SID can be turned off by the
CLR-button on the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
13
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
Correct position for safety belt
WARNING
• Only one person per safety belt!
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
• Anoutofpositionsafetybeltcanresult
in the wearer sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
applied hard or a crash occurs.
• Children up to 6 years of age must always
be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-
mends the use of a child seat for children
up to the age of 10.
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
• Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
Correct seating position
• Two people must never share one
safety belt. In the event of a crash
thosesharingabeltriskbeingcrushed
together and injured.
Consider this:
• Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs.
The shoulder strap must be as far in on
the shoulder as possible.
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Safety
To fasten the belt
Press the red button to release the belt
The belt guide on door pillar, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Belt height adjustment,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
The front safety belts have their lower
anchorage points on the seats. The safety
belts follow the seats when the legroom is
adjusted.
The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
safety belts can be set at different heights.
The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
adjustable due to the belt being incorpo-
rated into the seat.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Refer to page 260 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as
possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
15
Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
possible without rubbing against the neck.
To avoid chafing in the case of a short
person, the guide can be lowered until the
belt comes about an inch (a few centime-
ters) from the throat but still provides safe
restraint.
Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
thedesiredposition. Tolowerit,depressthe
catch release button while lowering the
guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
position.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Safety
Sport Sedan and SportCombi: The front
safety belts are equipped with pretension-
ers and force limiters. The pretensioners
are activated in the event of a violent frontal
or side-on crash. The safety belt pretension-
ers are only activated if the safety belt in
question is in use but not activated should
the car roll over.
Convertible:Thefrontandrearsafetybelts
are equipped with pretensioners and force
limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
the event of a violent frontal or side-on
crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
are only activated if the safety belt in ques-
tion is in use.
Safety belt pretensioners
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected and
replaced as necessary. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the movement of the body by ten-
sioning the belt, including in a roll over
crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
as gradually as possible.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the forward movement of the body
by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken-
ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi-
ble.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer for any
necessary repairs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
17
Safety belts, rear seat, Sport
Sedan and SportCombi
Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
page 75
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 136).
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Rear safety belts, Sport Sedan and SportCombi
The belt must be as far in ontheshoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
See page 260 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Securing an item on the rear seat
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
The three rear seats all have three-point
safety belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
youandinsertingthetongueintothebuckle.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Safety
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
Seats
WARNING
1 Height
2 Legroom
3 Backrest rake angle
4 Head restraint height
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Manually adjusted front seats 3
The following front seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
wheel (see page 118).
Electrically adjustable front seats 3
See page 20.
• Height 3
• Legroom
Height adjustment 3
Electric heating, front seats 3
• Backrest rake angle
• Lumbar support firmness 3
• Head restraint height
Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-
tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will
increase the height in steps.
See pages 113.
Press down the lever to lower the seat.
Repeated downward presses of the lever
will lower the seat in steps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
19
Adjusting the legroom
Adjusting the backrest
Adjusting the lumbar support
Legroom adjustment
Backrest rake angle
Lumbar support 3
Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
slide the seat to the desired position.
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbarsupportby
turning the knob.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
WARNING
Check that the seat is locked in the new
position. If not, it may move while the car
is being driven and it could result in injury
to the occupant in the event of a crash.
To find the most comfortable position, turn
the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
the backrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety
Electrically adjustable front
seats 3
WARNING
• The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-
ing the seat, and make sure that noth-
inggets caughtand damaged. Ensure
thatnothingcanbetrappedbehindthe
seat when adjusting it.
• Bear in mind that children can be
injured if they play with the electrically-
operated seats.
Adjusting the height and angle
Adjusting the legroom
• Always remove the remote control
when you leave the car to prevent
personal injury caused by the electri-
cally adjustable seats, for example,
due to children playing. Electrically
adjustable front seats with memory
function, see page 21.
Height adjustment and seat
angle
Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
section of the front lever.
Legroom adjustment
Adjust the legroom with the front lever.
Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
section of the front lever.
With the doors closed the seats can only be
adjusted when the ignition is ON.
However, there are two exceptions:
• To facilitate getting into the car, both
seats can be adjusted when either of the
front doors is open.
• The seats can be adjusted up to
2 minutes after both doors have been
closed (applicable only to cars without
window and sunroof pinch protection).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
21
Adjusting the rake angle
Adjusting the lumbar support
Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi
Memory function buttons
Backrest rake angle
Memory function 3
WARNING
Lumbar support 3
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbar support by
turning the knob.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
The legroom of the electrically operated
driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
whether or not a front door is open and
irrespective of the position of the ignition
switch.
Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
the rear lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Safety
When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
canbeadjusted. Whenthedoor isopen and
beforetheremote controlhas beeninserted
into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
The memory also includes the door mirror
settings.
Storing and restoring settings
1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The lumbar support is not included by
the memory function.
2 Press and hold the M-button and then
press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
the settings have been saved.
To recall programmed settings, press and
hold the desired memory button until the
seat and door mirrors adopt their pro-
grammed positions. The memory function
also includes the door mirror settings.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
door mirror can be angled down, refer to
page 122.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
23
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus
limiting the backward movement of the
head.
Head restraints
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Head restraint, Convertible, see page 74.
WARNING
Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-
end crash.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
The front and rear head restraints can be
raisedand lowered toa numberofpositions.
The front seat head restraints must be
set at a height where at least one notch
is visibleon the rear of the head restraint
stem (pole).
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
Inthispositiontheverticaldistancebetween
the top of the seat back and the head
restraint should be greater than 30 mm
when measured at the rear.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
Under no circumstances should the front
seat head restraint be forced down below
this position.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Safety
Child safety
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
• Never leave children unattended in a
Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of your car
• Teach children not to play in or around
cars.
car, even for a short time.
• Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
– Children can suffer heat stroke,
perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
• Watch children when loading or
unloading the car so they don´t get
locked in by mistake.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 150 cm
(59 inches) can be killed by
the airbag
• At gas stations, take the remote
control out of the car while filling the
tank.
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
or under motor vehicles.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• Keeptherearfold-downseatclosedto
help prevent children from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
• Always look for children before back-
ing your car out of a garage or drive-
way.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
25
The LATCH system consists of top tether
and lower anchorages . In this vehicle,
LATCH is installed at the two outboard seat-
ing positions in the rear seat, and there is a
top tether on the rear center position (not
Convertible).
General information on child
safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan-
dard for a uniform method of fitting child
restraints without using the standard safety
belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained. However, the type of restraint
must be appropriate for the size of the child.
We recommend that you always consult
your Saab dealer before fitting a child seat,
child restraint or booster cushion.
The top tethers are located on top of the
parcel shelf (Sport Sedan), see page 28, on
the back of the rear seat (SportCombi), see
page 29 and behind the head restraints
(Convertible) see page 30.
The lower anchorages are located where
the seat cushion and seat back come
together. There is a label above the anchor-
ages, see picture on next page. Label
consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
a seat inside a circle.
The LATCH system is installed in the car to
facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
designed for and equipped with LATCH
attachments.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Whenfittingchildrestraintsincarsyoumust
always read the instructions supplied by the
child restraint manufacturer.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child restraint instructions.
Ifyou haveany questions regardingLATCH
please contact your Saab dealer.
Saab recommends the use of a rear-
facing child seat for as long as this is
possible - for all children under 18 kg
(40 lbs.) as a minimum. Use a child seat
approved for the weight of the child.
Saabrecommendstheuseofaboosterseat
for children up to the length of 150 cm
(4 ft 11 in.) or the weight of 36 kg (80 lbs.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Safety
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Lower anchor and top tether anchor loca-
tions, Sport Sedan and SportCombi.
Convertible has two top tether anchors,
one behind each head restraint
(Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible
(Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
The right side and left side rear passenger
seating positions have exposed metal
anchors located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
27
LATCH child seat installation
Before starting the installation, please read
through this instruction, and the child seat
installation instruction.
1 Place the child restraint on one of the
designated outboard rear seat cush-
ions.
2 Slide the attachment on the child
restraint in between the seat cushion
and backrest.
3 Press the child restraint down on the
seat, 1 in illustration.
4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
up the inner restraint attachment arm
with the label, 2 in illustration.
Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
tether
Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
top tether
5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
Use the integrated harness to restraint the
child, according to the child restraint manu-
facturers instructions.
6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint attachment
arms are properly attached to the bars.
The availability of LATCH child restraints is
limited.
7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 28
and 30.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorage
bars and the top tether strap.
For the top tether, only use the strap sup-
plied with the child restraint.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Safety
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Sport Sedan
WARNING
Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Child top tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
illustration.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages. Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
in illustration.
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint, 1 in illustration.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
29
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
SportCombi
WARNING
Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Child top tether anchorages, SportCombi
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top
tether strap through the cargo net in such
a way that there is slack in the strap to the
child seat.
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages.Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
1 If the anchor for the desired seating
positionisnotintheuprightpositionthen
folddowntherearseatback(s) toaccess
the anchor(s).
2 Fold the backrest back upright.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
The top tether anchors are located on the
back of the rear seat frame above the floor
for each rear seating position.
5 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
6 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Safety
Child top tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Convertible
WARNING
Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
How to take away the head restraint
1 Raise the head restraint
2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
restraint straight upward
Top tether anchorages in the rear seat
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
WARNING
5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
6 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
If the size of the child restraint makes it
impossible to put the head restraint back
on, place it in the trunk.
The car is provided with two top tether
anchorages. Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
1 Remove the head restraint on the seat-
ing position where the child restraint
shall be fitted.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
7 Puttheheadrestraintbackonandmake
sure it is securely mounted. Adjust it in
its highest position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
31
Iffittingachildrestraintthatisintendedtobe
secured in position by the standard safety
belt, make use of the locking function of the
belt.
The safety belt locking function will be deac-
tivated when the safety belt is retracted.
Installation of child restraint
using the standard safety belt
1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
buckle.
2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
restraint, according to the instructions
from the child restraint manufacturer.
WARNING
Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
seat will work loose while the car is in
motion.
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of child restraint
systemscan cause yourchildto strike the
vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
crash.
3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-
ing sound ceases.
1 Position the child restraint in the back
seat.
2 Route the belt in the restraint according
to the installation instruction of the
restraint.
3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
Clicking sound indicates that the lock
function is in work.
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
child restraint in position.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the belt. The belt must not
unreel.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Safety
There are two impact sensors on the front
bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
soon after the moment of impact, these
register that the car is involved in a crash.
Using this information and data from the
central sensor in the control module, the
controlmoduledetermineswhetherornotto
inflate the airbags. The control module also
controls whether other components of the
airbag system are to be deployed: safety
beltpretensioners,inflatablecurtains(Sport
Sedan and SportCombi) and roll over bars
(Convertible).
Airbag system components
Airbag
• Airbag in steering wheel
• Airbag in instrument panel in front of
passenger seat
• Side airbags in front seat backrests
Convertible: The side airbags help
protect the head also
• Inflatablecurtainsalonglengthofheadlin-
ing (from front to rear roof pillars)
(Sport Sedan and SportCombi only)
• Safety belt pretensioners for front seats
Convertible: and outer rear seats.
WARNING
To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls
comfortably.
Which airbag system components are
deployed depends on a number of factors,
such as the force of the crash and the angle
of impact.
The airbag system supplements the protec-
tion provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of occupants taller than
59 in. (150 cm).
• Passengers 12 and under or shorter
than 59 inches (150 cm) must always
travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted
with a passenger airbag.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alenttoahigh-speedcrash(airbagsinflated
to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
beactivated(SportSedanandSportCombi)
see page 42.
Whenthesystemisactivatedatthemoment
of impact, the airbag inflates and then
deflates through holes in the back. The
whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
quicker than the blink of an eye.
• Never fit a child seat in front of the
passenger airbag.
If a fault arises in the airbag system during
a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
main instrument panel will come on and the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
The steering wheel and passenger airbags
are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
passenger airbag system compensates for
safety belt usage and the force of the crash
at the moment of impact.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
33
Inflated airbag (driver’s side).
Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
approx. 0.1 s
Both front airbags inflated
The driver and passenger front airbags are
triggeredby violent front-endcrashes. They
are not activated by minor front-end
impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
side-impacts.
Note:
Impact sensors react differently depending
on whether or not the front safety belts on
the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
Situations can therefore arise where only
oneoftheairbagsinflates. It isalsopossible
for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
activated and for the airbags to remain unin-
flated.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
impact, Stage II will automatically be acti-
vatedlatertoneutralizethegas generatorin
the airbag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Safety
Airbag system
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
1 Steering wheel with integral airbag
2 Passenger airbag
3 Side airbag
4 Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
5 Sensors in front bumper
6 Sensor, side-impact protection
7 Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
8 Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
35
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for
instance.
• If the airbag warning light
remains
WARNING
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer. The warning light could signify
that the airbags may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate with-
out a crash. See page 85.
• Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
• Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as
possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat
least 20 minutes.
• Always sit with the whole of your back
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Safety
Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
a front-end crash
Front passenger seat
WARNING
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
Moment of impact.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 59 inches
(150 cm)can be killedby the
airbag
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
apassengerairbag. Inflationoftheairbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
Sensors detect a
deceleration and send
a signal via the control
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the
airbag.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
The system is the same as that used on the
driver’s side.
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
The airbag systems are interconnected and
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
have a common warning light
. The pas-
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
senger airbag module is housed in the
fascia above the glove box and is marked
"AIRBAG".
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
• The glove box must be closed while
travelling. An open glove box door
could cause leg injuries in the event of
a crash.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
37
Passenger Sensing System
• Neverplaceanything onthedashorin
frontoftheseatas, in additionto being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interferewiththe function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
appliestothemountingofaccessories
on the dash.
Vehicles with a passenger sensing system
have indicator LEDs on the facia. The indi-
cators will be lit during the system check
when you turn the ignition switch to ST or
ON. When the system check is complete,
eithertheONortheOFFLED, willbelit. See
Airbag warning light on page 85. If your
vehicle does not have the indicators pic-
tured, then your vehicle does not have the
passenger sensing system.
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the dash, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
The passenger sensing system will turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and side airbag under certain conditions.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
U.S.
The driver’s airbags is not part of the pas-
senger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front pas-
senger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
Canada
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear rather
than the front seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Safety
Saab recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
• the right front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied
• the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child
is present in a forward-facing child
restraint
• the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her
weight off of the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied
by a smaller person, such as a child who
has outgrown child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the
airbag system or the passenger sensing
system.
Saab recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat,but if a child restraint
has been installed and the on indicator is lit,
turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Installation of child restraint using the stan-
dard safety belt on page 31.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accom-
modate a rear-facing child restraint. A label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-
facing child seat in the front.” This is
becausetherisktotherear-facingchildisso
great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING
If after reinstalling the child restraint and
restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still
lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s
seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and
adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also
make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this hap-
pens, adjust the head restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflat-
ing airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the passen-
ger’s frontalairbagifthesystem detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Saab recommends that rear-
facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
39
The passenger sensing system is designed
to enable (may inflate) the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sittingproperly in the rightfront passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system
hasallowedtheairbagtobeenabled, theon
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbag is active.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator
is lit, it could be because that person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,
turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright posi-
tion, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat
covers, can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. You may want to
consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehi-
cleformoreinformationaboutmodifications
that can affect how the system operates.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the pas-
senger sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating pos-
ture and body build. Everyone in your vehi-
cle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not thereis an airbag for that per-
son.
WARNING
Stowingof articlesunder the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light in the instru-
ment panel cluster ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, havethe vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag warning lamp on
page 43 for more on this, including impor-
tant safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Safety
Head protection
Side-impact protection
WARNING
• Theside-impactprotectionwillonlybe
activated in the event of a side-on
crash and not in the event of a rear-
end crash or the car rolling over. For
the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
see page 76.
The pillar trim and headlining (not Converti-
ble soft top) are designed to absorb energy,
softening possible blows to the head. After
acrash, theseitems must be changed in the
seat positions that were occupied. Never fit
accessories to the pillar trim or headlining
as these could reduce the effectiveness of
the head protection and inflatable curtain
(Sport Sedan and SportCombi).
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must be repaired immediately.
We recommend that you contact a
Saab dealer.
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra seat cover should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body (head also in Convertible), are
integrated in the outside edges of the front
seat backrests. The side impact protection
of the Sport Sedan and SportCombi also
includes inflatable curtains (see page 42).
• Never placeany objectinthe areathat
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
theseat, withyoursafetybeltcorrectly
fastened.
The side impact protection will be activated
if certain predetermined conditions are met
such as the force and angle of the impact,
the speed of the car on impact, and at which
point on the car´s side the impact occurs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
41
The side-impact protection is only activated
on the side of impact, while the safety belt
pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
The front seats and outer rear seats have
safety belt pretensioners.
There are two sensors on each side of the
car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
in the lower part of each C-pillar.
Convertible: The Convertible has two side
impactprotectionsensors,oneoneachside
of the car. These are located at the rear of
the sills.
Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Inflated side airbag with head protection,
Convertible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Safety
Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
• Do not position a sun visor or similar
item in the area that would be filled by
the inflatable curtain.
WARNING
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the roof pillars
andheadliningincorporatecushioning
material. Do not attach anything to the
car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
panels as this could prevent the side-
impact protection from providing the
intended protection.
• Do not sit with your head resting
against the side window. The inflat-
able curtain is designed to inflate
between the window and the head.
Resting the head against the window
could prevent the inflatable curtain
from providing the intended
protection.
• Do not stack loads so high that they
could encumber the inflatable curtain
in the event of a crash.
Inflated inflatable curtain, Sport Sedan
• Hang only light clothes from the hooks
ontherearseatcourtesyhandles.The
items of clothing must not contain
heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
wire coat hangers.
The inflatable curtains, which protect the
head, are concealed along the lengths of
the headlining (all the way from front to rear
roof pillars).
The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
time as the side airbags in the front seats in
case of a side-on impact.
The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
into the window area between the front and
rear roof pillars.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
for the steering wheel and passenger
airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
deployed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
43
Airbag warning lamp
WARNING
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the airbag module - the steering
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passen-
ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 85.
• The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Prohibited seating position
For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-
able curtain comes down from the headlin-
ing and covers a large portion of the side
windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Safety
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 278.
• Let only qualified technicians work on
yourairbagsystem. Improperservicecan
mean that your airbag system will not
work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Servicing the airbag system
WARNING
The airbag system must be inspected as
part of the normal service program but oth-
erwise may be regarded as maintenance-
free.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but can not get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing prob-
lemsfollowinganairbagdeployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Scrapping or working on airbag
and belt pretensioners
WARNING
Notice: If you damage the covering for
thedriver'sortherightfrontpassenger's
airbag, or the side impact airbag cover-
ing on the ceiling near the sidewindows,
the bag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger's airbag, or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for
the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
Inmanycrashessevereenoughtoinflatean
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield break-
age may also occur from the right front pas-
senger airbag.
• During any welding, both battery
cables must be disconnected and
covered.
• Beforequick dryingpaintinthevicinity
of the electronic control module, the
module’s grounding points and wiring
must be covered.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
must be deployed under controlled
conditions before the car is scrapped
oranyofthesystem’scomponentsare
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
45
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Frequently asked questions on
function of the airbag
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-
bags are fitted?
• Thecar'simpactprotectionconsistsof
several different safety features
including the airbags, seatbelts, steer-
ing wheel, seats and dashboard.
These parts are co-ordinated with
each other to provide optimum protec-
tion in the event of a collision, so never
install an airbag from one car into
another.
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tancebetweenyouandtheairbag.Forshort
drivers, specialaccessorypedalextensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Yes, always! The airbag system compo-
nents merely supplement the car’s normal
safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
willonlybeactuatedinamoderatetosevere
frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
of course, that they provide no protection in
minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side-
crashes or if the car rolls over.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
There is no guarantee that it would
then work satisfactorily in the event of
a collision..
When do the airbags in the steering wheel
and passenger side of the dash board
inflate?
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must be carried out by autho-
rized personnel only.
The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
movement of the body in a crash.
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof
the impacting object.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
The airbag canonly beactivatedonce in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
What won’t trigger the airbag?
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult, before they
are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
crash.
The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
somethingrelativelysoftandyielding(e.g. a
snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Safety
low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-
sarily be triggered.
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If thewarning light is on, it means that afault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air-
bags from working properly?
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is of an very short duration and will not
damage your hearing. For a short time after-
wards you could experience a buzzing
noise in your ears.
Yes. If youaddthings thatchange your vehi-
cle’s frame, bumper system, front end or
side sheet metal or height, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work prop-
erly if you relocate any of the airbag sen-
sors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Saab Customer Assis-
tance before you modify your vehicle. The
phone numbers and addresses for Cus-
tomer Assistance can be found on page
276.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Are the dust and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of
the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos-
sible getting dust on your skin as there is a
risk of skin irritation.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehiclemodified. HowcanIfindoutwhether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
Definitely not!
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the air-
bag.
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module or the inside rearview
mirror can affect the operation of the
advanced airbag system. If you have ques-
tions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance can be found on page 276.
The back seat is the safest place for chil-
dren.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.
Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
47
Security
Doors ________________
Central locking ________
Car alarm _____________
48
48
56
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Security
A key code number is supplied with your
car. This number needs to be quoted for
ordering a new traditional key (contained in
the remote control). Therefore, keep this
number in a safe place.
Doors
Central locking
Open the door by lifting the door handle.
WARNING
The following message appears on the
Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
door has still not been closed):
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked. If the code is
incorrect, the car will not start.
Close doors.
The car is supplied with two remote con-
trols. It is possible to have up to five remote
controls programmed for the car at any one
time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
obtained as soon as possible. We recom-
mendthat youcontacta Saabdealer. When
a new key is programmed into the car, the
lost key will be deprogrammed automati-
cally.
Remote control
The remote control and ignition key are inte-
grated in one unit, and referred to in this
manual as the remote control.
The remote control contains a mechanical
key, referred to in this manual as the tradi-
tional key. This traditional key can be used
in an emergency to lock or unlock the
driver’s door from outside (see page 50).
This key does not fit the ignition switch.
Note:
If a new remote control has to be ordered
and programmed, at least one old one is
required for the locking system’s electronic
unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
control.
Once the new remote control has been pro-
grammed, the old unit that is lost will not
work. Therefore you should carry two
remote controls separately, especially on
long journeys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
49
Remote control functions
Button Pressed once Pressed
twice
Hold and
NOTICE
press the
buttonmore
than 2 s
The remote control contains delicate
electronics.
Locks all doors.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
Unlocks driver´s Sport Sedan: Comfort
door.
The other
doors are
unlocked.
opening, see
page 119.
• Do not place the remote control where
it may be subjected to high tempera-
tures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
SportCombi:
The other
doors and tail-
gate are
• Warm the remote control in your
hands for a couple of minutes if it has
become very cold to prevent malfunc-
tion.
unlocked.
Remote control
1 Locks car
2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
Activates panic function
Sport Sedan:
Unlocks and
slightly opens
the trunk lid.
• For details on changing the battery,
refer to page 54.
SportCombi:
Unlocks the tail-
gate.
Checks number
of remote con-
trols, see
page 53.
Turnsonexterior
and cabin light-
ing*)(for30 s)or
turns off lighting
and deactivates
panic alarm.
Panic alarm
(activates
alarm manu-
ally), see
page 58.
*) parking lights, side direction indicators,
taillights and license plate lighting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Security
Remote unlocking
Locking/unlocking the car
Pressing the
door is unlocked.
button once: the driver´s
WARNING
Pressin a second time:
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Sport Sedan: the rest of the doors are
unlocked.
SportCombi: the rest of the doors and tail-
gate are unlocked.
Never lock anyone in the car.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
confirm.
Remote locking and unlocking also control
the car alarm.
Saab Information Display (SID), see
page 89.
Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
with the traditional key
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Remote locking
Intermittent malfunctioning
Press the
button once:
Equipment in thevicinity of the car that uses
the same frequency as the remote control
may cause interference to the remote con-
trol signal. In this case, retry from another
angle and aim at the receiver located by the
steering wheel.
Sport Sedan: all doors locked.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
SportCombi: all doors and tailgate locked.
1 Remove the traditional key from the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse of the remote control.
(This key only fits the front left-hand
door.)
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
confirm.
2 Unlock the door with the key.
The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-
tion switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
51
Locking a car with dead battery
Trunk lid/Tailgate
The steering wheel lock requires sufficient
battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the bat-
tery voltage drops below a certain level
while the remote control is in the ignition
switch, you will not be able to remove the
remote control.
Opening
Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is unlocked and
slightly opened when the button on the
remotecontrolorontheinsideofthedriver’s
door is pressed once.
If you must leave the car, proceed as
follows:
SportCombi: The tailgate is unlocked (not
opened)whenthe
buttonontheremote
1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock
buttons on the doors.
control or on the inside of the driver’s door
is pressed once.
2 Lock the front left door from outside with
the traditional key (see page 50). The
car is now locked but the car alarm will
remain inactive.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm.
Opening button on driver’s door
Closing
Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is locked when
closed.
SportCombi: The tailgate is not locked
when closed. It is locked together with the
doors when
button on the remote con-
trol is pressed once.
If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
closeditisarmedandthemovementsensor
in the cabin will be armed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Security
Switches on front doors
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car using the button by each
front door handle.
Locking the car with the remote control ren-
ders these buttons inoperative.
Sport Sedan
If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
door will unlock. Pressing the button a
second time will unlock the remaining
doors.
Central locking switch
Child safety locks
SportCombi
The button on the passenger door works in
the same way except that this first unlocks
the passenger door. During this operation
the rear doors remain locked.
Child safety locks
If you are sitting in the car and pressing the
button on the driver’s door, the driver’s
door will unlock. Pressing the button a
second time will unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate.
WARNING
If thecar is left with one or more doorsopen,
the interior lighting will be switched off auto-
maticallyafter20 minutes. Thisistoprevent
the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
has electrically adjustable seats, these will
cease to operate.
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
53
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are activated by means of
a catch next to the door latch.
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be
reprogrammed. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer (see page 295).
Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
(enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
45°.
Checking the number of remote
controls
Tocheckthenumberofremotecontrolsthat
are programmed for the car:
When the child safety lock is in the locked
position, the door can only be opened from
outside the car.
1 Inserttheremotecontrolintotheignition
switch and turn it to ON.
Trunk Release Handle
2 Press and hold the
button for more
than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the ON position.
Trunk Release Handle
3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
now display the number of remote
controls that are programmed for your
car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
ignition switch.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
Example of SID message:
NOTICE
Number of keys:
Active key number:
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Security
When the voltage of the remote control
battery drops below a certain level, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Changing the key battery
WARNING
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Keep the battery and other small compo-
nents of theremote control out of reach of
children.
Change the battery as soon as possible to
avoid malfunctioning.
Battery type: For optimum performance in
alltemperaturesandgoodservicelife,Saab
recommends the use of a Sony or Pana-
sonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
NOTICE
The electronics of the remote control are
sensitiveto electrostatic discharge. Incor-
rect handling when changing the battery
can damage the remote control. Avoid
touching electronic components of the
remote control with your hands.
Press the emblem to remove
the traditional key
The battery should last for about 4 years of
normal use.
The battery type is marked on the inside of
the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-
prints on the faces of the battery.
1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
remote control to remove the traditional
key.
2 Insertthetipof the key intothesmall slot
and turn the key to split the remote
control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
55
5 After changing the battery in the remote
control, it is only possible to use the
remotecontrolalimitednumber oftimes
before synchronization with the car is
lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons
ontheremotecontrolrepeatedlydirectly
after changing the battery.
Unlock the car and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch to
synchronize the remote control and car.
Immobilizer
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked and the LED on
the dashboard double-flashes for
3 seconds. Ifthecodeiscorrect, thecar can
be started.
Each time you remove the remote control
from the ignition, the electronic starting
interlock is activated, the LED double-
flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
immobilized.Ifanincorrectremotecontrolis
now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
the remote control of another car), the
immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-
ble to start the car.
If the central locking system does not work
after changing the battery and the car is
locked, proceed as follows:
1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi-
tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
will be tripped.
2 Open the door and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch. If the car
has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
The remote control and receiver unit are
now synchronized.
Change the battery and fit together
the two halves of the remote control
3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
so that it is positioned in the same way
as the old battery, with the positive (+)
side facing down.
If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
there is a problem checking the electronic
code of the remote control, the following
message will appear on the SID:
4 Fit the two halves of the remote control
together and press them together until
you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing
the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
into the remote control.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Security
Thealarmisarmed11 secondsafterthecar
has been locked by remote control.
Locking the trunk lid:
Car alarm
Sport Sedan
During the delay period, the LED shines
constantly. It will then start to flash once
every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
dashboard.
WARNING
If you open the trunk lid from outside the car
with the
button on the remote control,
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
you must lock the car with the
arm the car alarm.
button to
If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
is locked with the remote control, the LED
will flash 3 times per second for
11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
and trunk lid are closed.
SportCombi
If you unlock and/or open the trunk lid from
outside the car with the button on the
remote control, you must lock the car with
the button to arm the car alarm.
The car alarm is armed when the car is
locked with the remote control.
If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
to have the problem checked and rectified.
The car alarm will not be armed if you
lock the car with the traditional key (see
page 50).
All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
monitored by the alarm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
57
Toavoidanyinconvenience,makesurethat
anyoneusingthecar is familiar withhow the
car alarm and the locking system work.
Signals when the alarm is tripped
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
NOTICE
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
timeunlock the car, ifthebutton on the
key is pressed by mistake when the
car is still within its range.
If the alarm has been tripped since the car
was last locked, the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID) will display:
• all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
• the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
The signals can vary between markets
and due to legal and insurance require-
ments.
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
• When locking the car by remote
control in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking
buttons are all down.
If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Switching off the alarm if tripped
If the alarm has been triggered (direction
indicatorsflashingandhornsounding)itcan
be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
below).
If not, unlock and relock the car again.
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Arming the car alarm
Thealarmisarmedwhenalldoors,thehood
and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
car with the remote control.
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks car.
Turns off lights and horn.
Car remains locked.
What trips the alarm?
The alarm will be tripped if:
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks trunk.
• a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
• somebody tries to hotwire the car
Turns off lights and horn.
Turns on exterior and cabin light-
ing. Car remains locked.
If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
control to ON in the ignition switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Security
Panic function
Overview of functions
The car alarm includes a panic function. This function allows the
alarm to be started manually, for example, to attract attention.
Locking/arming Direction indicators flash once.
Unlocking/
disarming
Direction indicators flash twice.
The panic alarm can only be activated while the car is stationary.
The alarm is silenced if the car is driven off.
Unlocking/
disarming trunk
lid
Direction indicators flash three times.
When the alarm is tripped, the lights and horn come on for 3 minutes
or until you press one of the remote control buttons.
To start the alarm manually proceed as follows:
Alarm triggered Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
press one of the remote control buttons or turn
the remote control ON in the ignition switch.
• Pressandholdthe
buttonontheremotecontrolformore than
2 seconds, or if you are sitting in the car...
• Press and hold the or button on one of the front doors
for more than 2 seconds.
Remote control Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
In favorable conditions the range can be signif-
icantly greater.
To switch off the alarm:
• Press one of the remote control buttons or, if you are sitting in the
car, the or buttons on one of the front doors.
Remote control Normal life: approx. 4 years.
battery
Change the battery when the SID displays:
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
See Changing the key battery, page 54.
Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
page 295.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
59
Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
(SID) messages
Activity
LED signal
SID message
Reason/action
Arming (delay period)
Alarm armed
Disarming
Illuminates for 11 s.
Flashes once every 3 s.
Extinguishes.
Off.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Error when remote control
inserted into ignition switch.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Battery needs replacing.
See page 54.
Alarm not armed
Number of keys:
Active key number:
Check of the number of remote
controls programmed for your
car. See page 53.
A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes
open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.
period.
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
The alarm has been tripped
since the car was last locked.
Car immobilized but not locked. Off.
Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.
system, valid remote control
inserted or removed from ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Security
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
61
9-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top
Rollover Pop-up Bars ___
Electric windows_______
Interior lighting ________
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually ____________
76
77
78
operation___________
62
63
Operating the soft top__
Raising the soft top
manually ___________
SID warnings and
messages __________
"Easy entry"__________
Head restraints _______
68
79
80
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk __________
71
73
74
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible _________
75
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
9-3 Convertible
• Roof racks and ski holders must not be
mounted on the soft top.
• Onnoaccountshouldanythingbeputinto
the stowage space of the soft top (under
the soft top cover) since this could cause
an obstruction when the soft top is being
folded away.
• Do not place any objects on the covers
over the roll bars as this can hamper their
function.
• When operating the soft top, raise or fold
it fully until notified that operation is
complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft
top partially open/closed. If the soft top is
left in an intermediate position it will
collapse progressively after 20 seconds
to prevent overloading the drive system.
Advice on soft top
operation
• Once you have raised the soft top and
before driving off, always check that the
softtopis properly engagedwith thewind-
shield rail, see page 66.
• Once you have folded the soft top and
before driving off, check that the soft top
cover is locked, see page 64.
• Do not operate the soft top in tempera-
tures below 23°F (–5°C).
• Note that certain automatic car washes
can damage the soft top. This applies to
car washes that use mechanical feelers
bearing against the body. Saab advises
against washing the Convertible in an
automatic car wash.
WARNING
• Never touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top nor the upper rail of the
windshield while operating the soft
top.
• Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
• Washing the soft top, see page 261.
• After rain or washing the car, allow the
soft top to dry completely before folding it.
Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
water damage in the car and mildew to
form on the soft top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
63
Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
sectiononpage 62beforeoperatingthesoft
top.
Operating the soft top
WARNING
The soft top is operated with the switch on
the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
desired position until the soft top is fully
folded or raised.
• Donot touch thehinges or struts of the
soft top during opening due to the
pinch hazard.
The completion of folding or raising the soft
top is indicated by a chime.
• Keep children out of reach.
• Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
Error messages that can appear on the SID
are shown on page 71.
• Make sure that the soft top cover has
locked properly after folding the soft
top.
Switch for operating the soft top
• Check that the soft top engages prop-
erly with the upper edge of the wind-
shield after raising.
a Raising
b Folding
NOTICE
If you drive off while raising or folding the
soft top, operation is halted when
the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h). This speed can be
programmed(0–20 mph/0–30 km/h).We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer. The movement of the car and
force of the wind can seriously damage
the components of the soft top system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
9-3 Convertible
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
thesofttopisfullyfolded andthesoft top
cover raised. Completed folding is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 71.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while folding the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
Opening
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
the soft top to be folded:
• Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
(–5°C).
• The trunk lid must be locked.
• There must be sufficient space in the
trunk for the soft top.
If you continue to hold the button after the
chime, all the windows will open after a brief
delay.
Folding
Remote opening 3
You can fold the soft top when outside the
1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
car by pressing and holding the
(unlock) button on the remote control. See
also page 119.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
65
1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in
luggage compartment lowered.
3 Soft top folded.
4 The soft top cover is closed.
2 The soft top cover is opened.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
9-3 Convertible
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
thesofttopis fullyraisedand thesoft top
cover closed. Completed raising is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 71.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while raising the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
Raising
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
raising the soft top:
• Vehicle speed must not exceed
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• The trunk lid must be locked.
All side windows are opened slightly to pro-
tect the seals when the soft top is raised.
Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it
securely to the upper edge of the wind-
shield.
Raising
If you hold the button pressed up after the
chime, all the windows will be closed after a
short delay.
1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
67
1 The soft top cover is opened.
2 The soft top is raised.
3 The soft top cover is closed.
4 The rear window is lowered.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
9-3 Convertible
Raising the soft top
manually
WARNING
Only raise the soft top manually in an
emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
fault).
Do not touch the soft top button on the
instrumentpanelwhileclosingthesofttop
manually. This could cause personal
injury and damage the soft top mecha-
nism.
Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover
Do not fold the soft top having closed it
manually. This can damage the soft top
mechanism.
1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
screwdriver located under the luggage
compartment floor.
2 Remove the two covers from the side
trim in the trunk, one from either side.
If the soft top has been folded mechanically
there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it
is possible to raise it manually (the pressure
must be released from the hydraulic sys-
tem).
Tools under luggage compartment floor
If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
stand on either side of the car and perform
steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
forward thetwowire catches, one on the
left and one on right-hand side.
If the car is without electrical power, the
trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to
page 79.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
69
Soft top cover opened
Manual closing started
Soft top pulled towards windshield
7 Before raising the soft top, the two
4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it
will obstruct the soft top cover.
5 Open the soft top cover, upward and
backward.
WARNING
catches in the leading edge of the soft
top must be opened. Stand in the rear
seatandpryoffthecoverwiththescrew-
driver (the cover is fitted on the covering
in between the catches). Using the tool,
turn clockwise to open the catches.
Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of verti-
cal clearance.
• Do not touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top during raising.
6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.
• Keep your hands clear of the front
windshield rail.
• Pinch hazard may cause personal
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
9-3 Convertible
Soft top locked to windshield rail
Closing the soft top cover
Rear window locked to soft top cover
8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the
softtoptothewindshieldrail.Usethelug
wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly
1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that
thesoft top is properly locked in place by
pressing up the front edge. The soft top
must not move upward.
9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it
there. Close the soft top cover. It is not
possible to lock the soft top cover after
manual raising.
11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
tool (the same tool as used to lock the
soft top to the windshield rail) into the
hexagonal hole in the soft top mecha-
nism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counter-
clockwise on the right had side of the
soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
side. Look at the soft top cover when
locking the rear window. The rear
window must make a tight seal against
the soft top cover.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the paintwork on the
soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care
when closing the soft top cover.
10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top
as far as possible towards the soft top
cover.
The soft top system must be checked and
rectified without delay. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
71
SID warnings and messages
The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:
Cause
Suitable action
Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to
the windshield.
• Move the car so that it is standing level if on
a steep slope.
• Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
slightly. Fold the soft top again.
Soft top front
not locked.
This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
Soft top power pack
overheated.
continuously for more than 3 minutes.
cool down.
Move the object hindering soft top operation.
Move goods away from
soft top storage area.
Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
below 23°F (–5°C).
Operation at low temp.
may damage soft top.
Only manual operation
possible.
Soft top cover not
locked. Try again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
9-3 Convertible
Battery low.
The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
soft top operation.
Soft top obstructed.
Clear obstacles.
Complete soft top
operation to open trunk.
Complete soft top operation.
Complete soft top
Complete soft top operation.
Close the trunk lid.
operation before driving
Close doors.
Driver seat unlocked.
The backrest is not locked.
The backrest is not locked.
Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 73.
Passenger front seat
unlocked.
Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 73.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
73
"Easy entry"
WARNING
• Always check that the backrest locks
properly when returned to normal
position.
• Check that the fore-and-aft position of
the seat is properly locked. The back-
rest and the entire belt-in seat must be
locked in position; otherwise the occu-
pant of the seat is at risk of injury
during braking or in the event of a
crash, especially if a rear-facing child
seat is fitted behind the backrest.
To facilitate getting in and out of the rear
seat, the front seats can be slid forward.
"Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat 3
Manually adjusted passenger seats 3
Electrically adjustable front seats 3
Repositioning (seats without memory):
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
1 Tip the backrest back but not to its
normal position.
2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat
forward.
2 Tip the backrest forward.
3 The seat now moves to its foremost
position.
2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
has returned to its previous position.
3 Release the handle and move the back-
rest to locked position.
Repositioning:
Repositioning:
1 Tip back the backrest.
2 Slide the seat back to the desired
position.
1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
position.
2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
has returned to its previous position.
Make sure the backrest and seat are prop-
erly locked in position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
9-3 Convertible
Head restraints
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
Front head restraint
Rear head restraint
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
Under no circumstances should the front
seat head restraint be forced down below
this position.
The front head restraints can be raised and
lowered to a number of positions, the rear
has two positions.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
headrestraint forwardandupward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The frontseat headrestraints must be setat
a height where at least one notch is visible
on the rear of the head restraint stem (pole).
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
Inthispositiontheverticaldistancebetween
the top of the seat back and the head
restraint should be greater than 30 mm
when measured at the rear. See page 23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
75
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible
The two rear seats have three-point safety
belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible
The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
WARNING
Refer to page 260 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reducestherisk ofthe
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
• Make sure you use the correct seat-
belt buckle.
For how to secure loads on the rear seat,
refer to page 17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
9-3 Convertible
Rollover Pop-up Bars
The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are
located behind each rear seat head
restraint, are designed to deploy in the
event of a crash or rollover.
• Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with
great force, and you could be injured if
your arm or other body part, or if an
object is covering the bars when they
deploy. Don't put anything on the
cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
must be kept clear.
WARNING
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt - even if you have airbags and Roll-
over Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety
belt during a crash helps reduce your
chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it.
• The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
designed to deploy only once. If they
deploy, take your vehicle to a work-
shopimmediatelytohavetheRollover
Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
operate properly in the event of a
crash or rollover. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
Rollover Pop-up Bars
• The Rollover Pop Up Bars have
powerful springs that rapidly extend
the bars in rollover crashes, as well as
in moderate to severe crashes in
which the airbags deploy. Rollover
Pop Up Bars are supplemental to the
safety belts. They are designed to
work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
NOTICE
To avoid therisk of damage tothe soft top
do not operated the soft top while the
bars are extended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
77
To close
Soft top raised – The windows are operated
individually.
Electric windows
WARNING
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window closes both side windows.
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
Automatic closing of a front side window
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the activation of the
electric windows, for example, due to
children playing.
Raise the button all the way and release it.
The rear side window must be fully closed.
Pinch protection 3 is available for the front
side windows.
For further information on the electric win-
dows, refer to page 119.
Window switches
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
Deactivating the passenger door
window button
To open
With the
button on the driver’s door,
Soft top raised – The windows open individ-
ually.
you can deactivate the window button on
the passenger door.
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window opens both side windows.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to amber (deactivated).
Automatic opening
Press the button all the way down and
release it. If the soft top is folded, the rear
side window is also lowered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
9-3 Convertible
Calibrating front electric
Interior lighting
windows with pinch protection 3
The interior lighting consists of a front roof
light, two front reading lights, footwell light-
ing and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
light switches are located in the roof con-
sole.
The window liftsshould becalibratedif auto-
matic closing does not work or if the battery
has been disconnected. The pinch protec-
tion will not work if the windows are not
calibrated.
The cabin lighting comes on:
Perform calibration as follows:
1 Make sure the soft top is raised.
2 Make sure the doors are closed.
3 Let the engine idle.
4 Press and hold the soft top button up
until a chime sounds.
• When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
• When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
Front interior lighting - Convertible
1 Left-hand reading light
2 Cabin light
The lighting goes out:
During calibration, the four windows will
be raised and lowered several times.
• When the car is locked.
3 Right-hand reading light
• When the ignition is turned on.
• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
Ifcalibrationfailstwiceinarow,havethecar
checked and rectified. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
the interior lighting goes out automatically
after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
The interior lighting can be switched off
completely.
1 Open the driver’s door.
2 Turnoff the cabin lighting with the center
button, see illustration.
This is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned to position ON or when the car is
locked with the remote control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
79
Glove box
The glove box lighting comes on when the
compartment is opened and goes out when
it is closed.
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually
If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
locking system, it can be unlocked
manually.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 230.
Sun visor
1 Take the traditional key out of the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse (see page 54).
2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
your nails, a credit card or similar so as
not to damage the paintwork.
An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on
the inside of the sun visors. The lighting
comesonwhenthecoverisraisedandgoes
out when it is closed.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting comes on and goes out
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
key.
Unlocking the trunk lid manually
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer to have the central locking system
checked.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 min to
prevent the battery from running flat.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 232.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
9-3 Convertible
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk
There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as
follows.
1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the
first bag to the right.
2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
lies on its widest side and slide it
forward, in under the soft top storage
(see illustration).
3 Put in the second bag in the same way
as the first, but lie it on its narrow side
(see illustration).
Position of first golf bag
Position of second golf bag
Spoiler on trunklid 3
WARNING
Some models have a spoiler on the trunk-
lid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
trapped between the spoiler and rear
fender when closing the trunklid.
Wind deflector 3
A wind deflector is available as an acces-
sory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
with the wind deflector carefully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
81
Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator
lights _______________
82
87
Instruments ___________
Saab Information Display
(SID)________________
Switches _____________
89
97
Wipers and washers ____ 101
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)__ 106
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Instruments and controls
Main instrument panel
Warning and indicator
lights
The warnings and indications that can be
shown depend on the engine variant and
equipment level.
Antilock braking warning
This warning light illuminates when a fault
arises in the antilock brake system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
U.S. shown, Canada similar
The brake system will continue to function
but without ABS modulation. See also
page 170.
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
5 Engine temperature gauge
6 Information display
2 Speedometer
3 Turbo gauge
7 Trip meter reset button
4 Fuel gauge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
83
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
Charge warning light
This light comes on when the battery is not
being charged by the alternator. If the light
comes on during driving, stop as soon as
possible and switch off the engine.
This light will come on if the engine oil pres-
sureis too low. If the warninglight flashes or
comes on while you are driving, stop imme-
diately in a safe place, switch off the engine
and check the oil level (see page 207).
WARNING
An illuminated “Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Never drive the car when the oil pressure
warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
cause serious engine damage.
Check the drive belt, see page 216.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Instruments and controls
This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
or ignition system. The car may still be
driven with care but the performance of the
engine will be somewhat diminished (see
page 154).
WARNING
Front fog lights 3
• Never drive the car if these two lights
are on at the same time. Danger of
brake failure!
This light indicates when the front fog lights
are on (see page 99).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
The front fog lights are switched off auto-
matically when the engine is switched off.
When the fog lights are next needed, they
will have to be switched on manually.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voiris below theMIN mark, the vehicle
should be transported on a recovery
vehicle.
Reduced engine power.
Contact service.
• Have the brake system checked
immediately at a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Brake warning light
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 211).
The car should be checked immediately
at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
faults from arising.
This light should come on briefly when you
turntheignitionkey toON. Ifitdoesn´tcome
on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem. This light indicates
when the brake fluid level is too low (see
page 211).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelisstillnormal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest workshop to have the
brake system checked. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
High beam Indicator
This light shows when the high beam is on
(see page 98).
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
85
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-
utes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s load.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Parking brake warning
light
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
This light comes on when the parking brake
is applied (see page 177).
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
Ifa fault arisesintheEBD function, the
,
WARNING
and lights will come on. Also, the
following message will appear on the Saab
Information Display (SID):
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Release park brake.
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
Ifthis isthecase, drivecarefully andcontact
a workshop as soon as possible. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. Refer
to Brake warning light on page 84, Antilock
brakingwarningonpage 82andESP OFF
indicator on page 86.
WARNING
®
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 177.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the remote control.
• Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
Safetybelt reminder
This light will come on for about four sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position.
This light reminds the driver to buckle up,
see page 12.
Airbag warning light
This light comes on if a potentially serious
fault has occurred in the airbag system, see
also page 32.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Instruments and controls
This symbol lights up when the system is
®
disengaged using the ESP button.
Indicator, fuel
ESP® indicator
If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
®
be turned off by pressing the ESP button.
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
tank.
This symbol lights up when the system is
operative.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
®
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
NOTICE
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
If so, have the system checked at a Saab
dealer.
®
ESP OFF indicator
See also Electronic Stability Program
(ESP ) 3 on page 175.
®
WARNING
Headlight and parking
light indicator
The system improves ride comfort and
safety during normal driving. It must
however not be regarded as a system
to enable the driver to maintain higher
speeds. The same precautions as
normal for safe cornering and driving
on slippery roads must be adopted (see
pages 173/ 175).
This light indicates that the headlights or
parking lights are on.
Cruise control indicator
light
This light comes on when the system is
engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
87
Autochecking of lights, main
instrument panel
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
The warning and indicator lights shown
above should come on when the ignition
switch is turned to ON. They should go out
after about 4 seconds once the engine has
started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
of each system or function.
Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer dis-
plays the speed of the car in miles per hour
(mph).
Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer
displays the speed of the car in kilometres
per hour (km/h).
A protective function (interruption of the fuel
supply) limits the engine speed within the
red zone.
It receives information about vehicle speed
from the ABS’s wheel sensors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Instruments and controls
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-
able place and allow the engine to idle. If
theneedlecontinuestorise, switchoffthe
engine.
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,
stop thecarassoonas it issafe to do soand
check the coolant level (see page 209).
WARNING
Temperature gauge
Turbo gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
used for combustion, which is equivalent to
the engine load.
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cooling-
system can cause hot coolant and steam
to be released. Failure to heed this warn-
ing may result in personal injury.
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
Atlowloadsandwhentheengineisusedfor
braking, the needle will move within the
white zone.
If the needle goes into the red zone (which
can occur at high outside air temperatures
or under heavy engine loads), choose the
highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
down.
Under certain barometric conditions the
needle may enter the first part of the red
zone without necessarily indicating that a
fault has arisen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
89
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
limiting the boost pressure, you should
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
Saab Information
Display (SID)
• Various types of information are shown
on the SID: warnings, indications, trip
computer information and information
from the car’s Infotainment System.
If the speed of the car exceeds 143 mph
(230 km/h), acceleration is limited by reduc-
ing the boost pressure. Thepressuregauge
then moves towards the middle of the white
field, indicating a drop in engine power and
consequently the car’s speed.
• Selected gear is shown on the left-hand
side of the display. When gears are
selected manually, the letter M (manual)
and the selected gear are displayed (see
page 168) (cars with automatic transmis-
sion).
• Inthefirstrow tripcomputer informationis
displayed and in the second row odome-
ter and tripmeter is displayed.
Fuel gauge
When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
the main instrument panel comes on.
Refueling, see page 157.
When a message is displayed
The odometer and tripmeter is temporarely
turned off when a two row message is dis-
played. The icon is displayed in the left part
of the display.
The warnings and indications that can be
shown on the SID are listed on page 296.
If there is more than one message on the
SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left
of the first message. Each message will be
displayed for 10 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Instruments and controls
PresstheCLRbuttontoacknowledgea SID
message. If you acknowledge a message
but do nothing about it, the message will be
displayed again the next time you start the
car.
Trip computer function of the SID
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
When the engine is switched off the warn-
ing/indicator lights still active are displayed,
this is to remind the driver. At this point the
warning/indicator lights previously acknowl-
edged with the CLR button are also dis-
played.
SID is available in two levels, SID1 and
SID2. which one xx that your car has
depends on the car´s equipment level.
You can adjust the settings of several of the
car’s systems, such as the alarm 3, rain
sensor 3andclimatecontrolsystem.These
are known as Settings se page 94.
SID, control unit and display
SID1 contains the following functions:
Temp
D.T.E.
Outdoor temperature
Odometer and trip meter
Reset button
The reset button is positioned immediately
to the left of the speedometer.
Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
When the possible range is
less than 18 miles (30 km)
then the text Refill fuel now
is displayed.
The odometer records the distance trav-
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
on Canadian vehicles).xx
Press once to resets the trip meter, the igni-
tion shall be in position ON.
Fuel Ø
Average fuel consumption
since function last reset
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
91
Outdoor temperature
WARNING
Setting values
SID2 3 also contains the following fea-
tures:
1 Select one of the functions using the
steering wheel controls, or
• Dist(presetto100miles(100 km)ifnot
previously set)
• Speed Ø
• Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Usethesteeringwheelcontrolstoselect
the value. (Press CLR to reset the
value.)
.
Dist
Distance to destinations.
Function can also be used as
a trip meter
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
Speed Ø Average speed since func-
tion last reset
Speed W Speed warning (chime)
The Temp function is always activated
(eveninNIGHTPANELmode)iftheoutdoor
temperaturerisesor fallstobetween26and
38°F (–3 and +3°C).
Settings
Settings of features such as
alarm clock, language and
rain sensor 3
4 Press the SET button to finish setup.
Phone 3 Managing of number list, see
Ifthetemperaturesensor, locatedunder the
front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
temperature readings will be unreliable.
Infotainment Manual.
Using DIST as a trip meter
1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
Whentheengineisstarted, thefunctionthat
was selected when the engine was
switched off is displayed, with the following
exceptions:
controls,
or
.
2 Press and hold the CLR button for
approx. 1 second.
An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
side of the display, indicating that the trip
meter is running.
• Temp is displayed if the outside tempera-
ture is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C).
• D.T.E. is displayed if less than or equal to
30 miles (50 km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Instruments and controls
Resetting a single function
Speed warning
Calculating the arrival time
1 Select the function you wish to reset
using the steering wheel controls,
.
• Fuel Ø (the value is rest to 10l/100 km)
• Speed Ø
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
The value can be set to between 0 and
150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive?)
or
Thisfunctionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
1 Select Speed W using the steering
wheel controls,
or
.
To calculate the arrival time, the distance
must first be given.
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Adjust the speed using the steering
wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
2 Press and hold the CLR button for
approx. 1 second.
1 Select Dist using the steering wheel
controls,
or
.
The selected function will now be reset.
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Set the distance to the destination using
the steering wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Resetting the trip computer
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
Press and hold the CLR button (approx.
3 seconds) until audible confirmation is
given.
The word ON on the right-hand side of the
display indicates when the speed warning
function is active.
The following functions will be rest:
• Fuel Ø (the value is reset to 10l/
100 km)
The calculated arrival time will now appear
on the right-hand side of the display.
An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
is exceeded.
If you take a break, this time will be added to
the previously calculated arrival time.
• Speed Ø
DisengagethefunctionwiththeCLRbutton.
Re-engage the function using the SET but-
ton.
• D.T.E. (the value is reset to the
distance possibleon the remaining fuel
if fuelconsumptionis10l/100 km, lower
consumption means a longer possible
distance)
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
93
You can check the distance left by selecting
Dist. At the same time you can check the
calculated time of arrival.
Calculating the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
NIGHTPANEL
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive and know what my average speed will
be?)
After the distance to destination has
decreasedtozero, Distwillfunctionasatrip
meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The
starting value for the trip meter will be the
last distance set for the Dist function.
This function shouldbeusedbeforestarting
out a journey.
When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated.
First, set the distance under Dist.
Example: The Dist function is set to
100 miles. After the count-down has
reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
beginning at 100 miles.
1 Then select Speed Ø function.
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
All other instrument lighting will be switched
off and the needles drop to zero.
Note: All indicator and warning lights and
messages will operate normally if required.
3 Set the estimated average speed using
the steering wheel controls.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Temp (when the outside temperature falls
or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
(50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
Panel model.
The distance and the calculated time of
arrival is now displayed.
The time of arrival is updated during the
journey based on the average speed since
Dist was set. The speed of the car must
exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
By selecting Dist during the journey, you
can see how much distance is left to travel.
When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
meter. The trip meter starts from the dis-
tance that was set previously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Instruments and controls
Under Settings you can choose whether
the entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph)
or only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should
be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
Alarm
Settings
Under this heading you can select for exam-
ple language and units.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls,
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Alarm Clock using the steering
wheel controls.
ON or OFF is displayed.
• If OFF is shown and the alarm time is to
be set, press SET button (do not keep
held in) and wait for the audible signal.
The previously time set is now shown.
Press SET button.
• If ON is shown and the alarm time is to
be activated, press SET button once,
OFF is shown in the display. Press SET
button again to activate the function.
4 Select alarm time using the steering
wheel controls.
5 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
or
.
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls,
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select heading using the steering wheel
controls.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select usingthesteeringwheelcontrols.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
1 Select Settings using the steering
or
.
wheel controls,
or
.
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Speed Scale Illum.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
Settings
Select EXIT once you have made the
desired settings.
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
When the alarm sounds push one of the left
steering wheel controls.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
95
The number of systems that are displayed
on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
level. The list shown below includes the
systems that can be found in your car.
Language.
ENGLISH UK
Unit
METRIC
ENGLISH US
FRANCAIS
US
Rain Sensor, page 103.
IMPERIAL
HIGH
DEUTSCH
Climate System, page 114.
Next Service: xx%.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
MEDIUM
ITALIANO
LOW
ESPANOL
Theft Alarm, page 56.
SVENSKA
FULL ALARM
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
Time for Service.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
DOOR ONLY
Park Assistance, page 180.
0–90 mph
ON
Speed Scale Sel.
BOTH SCALES
ONLY MPH SCALE
MAIN & INTERMED
OFF
Reset Service Ind?
YES NO
Alarm Clock, page 94.
ON
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Instruments and controls
Explanation of the various selections under
Resetting the service indication
Unit
Select the desired group of units.
Settings.
Reset the service indication in accordance
with the following:
Rain Sensor
Next Service: xx%
1 Turn the remote control to the ON posi-
tion, the engine must be switched off.
2 Select Settings using the steering
The sensitivity has three levels.
Park Assistance
Displayedpercentageisapproximately
equivalent to the condition of the
engine oil. 100% is equivalent to new
engine oil. The type of service that is
required is also shown here.
wheel controls,
or
.
The Park Assistance can be shut off by
choosing OFF.
3 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
4 Select Time for Service.
5 Press the SET button.
6 To the question Reset Service Ind?
select YES (Press CLR button to undo).
Alarm Clock
Time for Service.
Setting of alarm clock is possible.
Language
:When it is time for service the required
service type is displayed.
Select the desired language. The
number of languages can vary
between markets.
INTERMEDIATE
MAIN
Clock
Adjustments can be made in the Infotain-
ment system.
MAIN & INTERMED
Speed Scale Illum.
A service indication must only be
reset after the service has been
performed.
Select the proportion of the speedo-
meter to be illuminated in NIGHT-
PANEL mode.
See separate Manual.
Speed Scale Sel.
Select if both scales or just mph-scale
shall be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL
mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
97
Headlight levelling 3
Switches
Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
with an automatic headlight levelling sys-
tem, which self-calibrates each time the
vehicle is started.
Daytime Running Lights
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
levelling system, the headlights will be
angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accord-
ingly as the range of the headlights will be
reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
fuse box (see page 239).
High beam can not be activated in this posi-
tion but headlight flasher can.
Parking lights
A fault in the system will produce the follow-
ing message on the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID):
Light switches
The parking lights can be turned on irre-
spective of the position of the ignition
switch. If the parking lights are on and the
driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
them off will sound.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Do not use the parking lights alone while
driving.
Special equipment is required for adjusting
the basic headlight alignment.
The parking lights may be used in combina-
tion with the front fog lights (see page 99).
Headlights
Low beam headlights are turned on when
the ignition switch is turned to ON and
turned off when the switch is turned back to
LOCK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Instruments and controls
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
A delay function allows the low beam head-
lights and back-up lights to remain on for
about30 secondsafterthedriver’sdoorhas
been closed.
To activate this function:
1 After turning off the engine, remove the
remote control.
2 Open the driver’s door.
3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
the steering wheel.
The low beam headlights and reversing
lights will come on and remain on for
30 seconds when the door is closed.
Dipswitch
1 Headlight flasher
2 High/low beam
Adjusting instrument illumination
Instrument lighting
High/low beam
The brightness of the instrument lighting
can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
- signs on the button above the NIGHT-
PANEL button).
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk all the way towards the
steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
ON.)
The
symbol on the main instrument
panel shows when the high beam is on.
Headlight flasher
To flash your headlights, pull the control
stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
The high beam will remain on until you
release the stalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
99
Rear fog light
To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
foglightbuttonontheinstrumentpanel. The
headlights or front fog lights must be on.
The rear fog light is automatically turned off
when the engine is switched off. When the
carisnextstarted, therearfoglightwillhave
to be switched back on manually by press-
ing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
light will remain on.
Rear fog light consists of one bulb.
Front fog light switch
Rear fog light switch
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of rear fog light.
Front fog lights 3
The front fog lights should be used in poor
visibility.
Theseareautomaticallyturnedoffwhenthe
engine is switched off. When the car is next
started, the fog lights will have to be
switched back on manually by pressing the
fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
remain on.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of front fog
lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Instruments and controls
Hazard warning lights
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
theyshouldbesetupalongthesideof the
road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
behind your vehicle. If the car is not
clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
further back.
Turn signal & lane change indicators
1 Right
2 Left
Hazard warning light switch
The button for the hazard warning lights is
located on the climate control panel.
When the button is pressed, all the direction
indicators andthesymbolinthebuttonflash
simultaneously.
Turn signal & lane change
indicators
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
The stalk switch has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
indicating a right or left turn, that are can-
celled automatically when the steering
wheel is centered.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if,becauseofanaccidentorbreakdown,the
car constitutes a hazard to other road users.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
breaks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 101
Priority of audible information
If two or more functions are active simulta-
neously, the most important function at that
time will be prioritized.
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers
Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
If, for example, the direction indicators are
active when you engage reverse, the park-
ingassistance(iffitted)willbeheardinstead
of the direction indicators. When reverse is
disengaged, the direction indicators will be
heard, if they are still active.
In position 2 you can set the delay period for
intermittentwipingusingthethumbwheelon
the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
15 seconds.
The wipers always returntotheir homeposi-
tion when the ignition is turned off.
To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
the windshield, proceed as follows:
Back-Up
The back-up lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
1 Switch off the engine and remove the
remote control.
2 Activate the wipers within the next
16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
down.
Button for accessory 3
This button can be used for accessories,
such as extra lights.
When the ignition is next switched on the
wipers will return to their home position.
Changing wipers blades, see page 217.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Instruments and controls
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Headlight washers 3
Theheadlightsarewashedatthesametime
as the windshield if the headlights are on.
The headlights are washed every fifth time
the windshield washers are used or if two
(2) minutes have elapsed since the wind-
shield was last washed.
Windshield wipers
0 OFF
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Single sweep
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Low speed
The headlight washers are not activated at
speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing 3
Washers
Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel.
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If
the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 103
Ifthestalk switch isleft inthe AUTO position
when the engine is switched off, when the
engine is next started it must first be moved
tothe 0or 3 position and then back toAUTO
to reactivate the sensor.
Rain sensor 3
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ONtoavoidpersonalinjurywhenclearing
snow and ice from the windshield.
If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
operate at low speed when the stalk switch
is set to the AUTO position.
NOTICE
Turn the rain sensor off before washing
the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
damaging the windshield wipers.
Windshield wipers with rain sensor
0 OFF
1 Single sweep
2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged
3 Low speed
When the rain sensor isactivated the follow-
ing symbol is displayed in SID
.
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing 3
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
make one sweep for reference to see how
much water is on the windshield. In the
future, the sensor compares the amount of
water on the windshield with this reference
value.
The system varies the frequency of wiping
between single sweeps and continuous
wiping, depending on the amount of pre-
cipitation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Instruments and controls
Adjusting sensitivity
Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
Rain Sensor
HIGH
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjustedunderSettings.Ifyouincreasethe
sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
for reference.
HIGH
The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
The wipers start when there is only
a small amount of water on
the windshield.
MEDIUM
LOW
1 Select Settings using the steering
wheel controls,
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Rain Sensor.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select the sensitivity.
or
.
The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
somewhat more sensitive at night. This
adjustment is automatic.
MEDIUM
The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
This is one of the Default Settings.
LOW
The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wip-
ers operate only with a large amount of
water on the windshield, i.e., down-
pour).
6 Confirm this selection by pressing the
SET button.
Go back/modify using the CLR-button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 105
The washer jet is not adjustable.
Rear window wiper, SportCombi
Changing wiper blade, see page 217.
To obtain:
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 litre, the rear window washer is deacti-
vated. This is in order to prioritise the wind-
shield. The following message is displayed
on the SID:
• a single sweep: move the control to
position 2, the control springs back to the
home position.
• intermittent wiping, 6 s: move the control
to position 2.
Ifthewindshieldwipersareactivatedthen
the rear window wiper will automatically
changeover to intermittent wiping when
reverse gear is engaged and the engine
is running.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
• washing and wiping: move the control to
position 3.
Rear window wiper, SportCombi
1 OFF
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Washing and wiping
The control returns to the home position.
The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the
washing has finished. If the speed of the
car is below 40 km/h when the washing
has finished the wiper makes an extra
sweep after 5 s to wipe off any washer
fluid residue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Instruments and controls
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
passes through an effective filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in theparcelshelf. It is thenled
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The Automatic Climate-Control system
(ACC) automatically maintains the desired
cabin temperature, regardless of the
weather outside.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way.
ACC panel
8 Temperature setting: right-hand side
9 Seat heating, front right seat
10 Manual increase of fan speed
11 Hazard warning lights
12 Manual decrease of fan speed
13 Seat heating, front left seat
1 Temperature setting: left-hand side
2 Manual setting of air distribution
3 Recirculation
Note that heating or cooling is not
speeded up by setting the temperature
higher or lower than the final tempera-
ture you desire.
4 AUTO (automatic regulation)
5 A/C
6 Defroster
7 Rear window heating
To optimize the performance of the air con-
ditioning system, all windows and the
moonroof 3 should be shut. The air vents in
the fascia must be open.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of
noxious substances such as benzene and
toluene are also reduced.
To reduce potential misting on theinsides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more
frequently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 107
The system uses seven sensors:
• Outside air temperature sensor
• Cabin air temperature sensor (by the inte-
rior rearveiw mirror)
• Sun sensor (on the facia)
• Blended air temperature sensors 2
(located in the front floor vents).
• Blended air temperature sensors 2
(located in the outer panel vents).
Note:
If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
system will not be able to regulate the cabin
climate as intended.
Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan and
Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
SportCombi
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Instruments and controls
• The most usual temperature setting is
between 64–75°F (18–24°C), depending
on personal preference and what clothing
is worn.
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
1 Driver’s zone.
2 Passenger zone.
• Change the temperature setting in 2°F
(1°C) steps.
Make sure the air vents are open when cool-
ing the cabin in warm weather.
The temperature in the rear seat will be a
mixture of the two zones.
When the ignition is switched off, only the
temperature control affects the system the
next time the engine is started. The system
will warm up/cool down to the temperature
to which the control is set.
The cabin temperature can be set to
between 61–79°F (16–26°C).
The selected temperature is not the actual
air temperature but corresponds to the com-
fort level normally experienced at that tem-
perature after allowance has been made for
theairflow,relativehumidity,solarradiation,
and so on, currently prevailing inside the
car.
Panel vent
Air vents
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
of the floor console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 109
MAX heat (red indicator):
MAX cooling (blue indicator):
Condensation water
MAX heating is obtained when the tempera-
ture knob is turned to the first position past
26 (to the red LED).
MAX cooling is obtained when the tempera-
ture knob is turned to the first position past
16 (to the blue LED).
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
The driver’s side selection controls air dist-
ribution and the recirculation status. The
temperature can be adjusted on the pas-
senger side.
The driver’s side selection controls air dist-
ribution and the recirculation status. The
temperature can be adjusted on the pas-
senger side.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
MAX heating produces:
MAX cooling produces:
• Maximum heat.
• Air distribution to windscreen and floor.
• Recirculation OFF.
• Max. cooling effect (A/C compressor will
run even if AC OFF has been selected).
• Air distribution through panel vents.
• Maximum fan speed.
• High fan speed.
• Recirculation ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 110
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
Therearwindow and door mirror heating is controlled
manually.
Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is
clear of ice and misting to avoid imposing a heavy
load on the battery longer than necessary. Note, how-
ever, that heating will deactivate automatically after a
set time.
Ifamanualfunctionis selected, itwillbelockedinbutotherfunctions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir-
culation will be controlled automatically.
Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
air distribution selections.
When the engine is started, the ACC system will be in
AUTO mode.
Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.
If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C-compressor will be
disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button
will illuminate.
Recirculation is controlled manually to optimise cool-
ing although it can also be switched on and off man-
ually.
Recirculation does not appreciably change the air
quality but it can be useful to switch it on to prevent
unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.
The A/C-compressor is turned off.
The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified. Tem-
perature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation
will be controlled automatically.
Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights
up.
ACC-system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C-compressor OFF.
Air distribution selections locked in current settings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Heating 3 of the front seats is deactivated.
Pressing AUTO-button will put the system into auto-
matic mode.
Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one
click causes the system to resume any manual selec-
tions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Defroster and floor vents
One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,
all the windows (except the rear side windows, where
the air flow is off) are demisted by:
• High fan speed.
• The air is directed to the defroster vents.
• Temperature increases somewhat.
• Recirculation OFF.
Floor vents
• Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.
Thedefrosterfunctionremainsengageduntilanother
selection is made. Heating of the rear window/door
mirrors will, however, deactivate after a set time
period.
Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen wit-
hout the fan speed being increase or the rear window
heating being switched on.
To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO but-
ton.
Floor and panel vents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 112
Start in cold weather:
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
Panel
Start in warm weather:
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will activate the A/C compressor (unless the
AC OFF switch has been pressed).
If the ambient air temperature is over 77°F (25°C), the recirculation
cuts in after 0-15 seconds, if this is required in order to reach the
desired temperature.
Defroster, panel and floor
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 113
Formation of ice and mist in
extreme weather conditions
Calibration
Electric heating, front
seats 3
Calibration is performed automatically
every 40:th time the car is started after
having been switched off for more than
2 hours or if the battery has been discon-
nected.
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes. The fol-
lowing measures are recommended if such
problems should occur:
Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront
seats are heated.
Heating is thermostatically controlled.
The heating has two effect steps.
Programming
A number of functions can be customized
under Settings (see page 114).
We do notrecommend prolongeduse of the
higher level for people with sensitive skin.
1 Select AUTO and set the temperature to
70°F (21°C)
2 Push one time on the defroster button. If
this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not
enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
Heating is controlled manually but can also
be automatic. Refer to Settings on
page 114.
Tips
(before contacting a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer)
• If you feel that the ACC system is not func-
tioning satisfactorily, select "Default
Settings" under Settings (see page 114.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Instruments and controls
ACC- Convertible
Settings
Settings
When the soft top is folded, several func-
tions in the ACC-system is effected.
Some of the functions of the ACC system
can be customized.
Climate System
Rear Defroster
AUTO
1 Select Settings using the steering
The system adjusts itself as follows:
wheel controls,
or
.
• xxAUTO goes out.
• Heating, airdistributionandfanspeedare
not affected.
• Recirculation and rear window heating
are cut out.
• The A/C compressor is switched off (man-
ual activation is possible by pressing the
AC button).
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Climate System.
MANUAL
Heated Seats
AUTO
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select the Rear Defroster, Heated
Seats, Fan Settings, A/C Mode or
Default Settings.
6 Press the SET button.
7 Make your selection.
MANUAL
Fan Settings
HIGH SPEED
MEDIUM SPEED
LOW SPEED
A/C Mode
All manual selections are possible with the
exception of rear window heating and
defroster function.
8 Confirm your selection by pressing the
SET button.
When the soft top is raised, the system
reverts to the AUTO mode and the set tem-
perature.
AUTO
Note: When the soft top or all the windows
are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
air conditioning on manually can cause con-
densation to form on cold surfaces, such as
the air ducts.
OFF
Default Settings
Are you sure?
YES NO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 115
Explanation of how the ACC system can be
customized under Settings.
Heated Seats
Fan Settings
AUTO:
HIGH SPEED:
Rear Defroster
The front seat heating is controlled
This selection give a slightly higher
fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
though with continued automatic
regulation.
automatically.
AUTO:
Select the level by repeatedly
pressing the appropriate button on
the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
= low. The selected heating setting
is saved when the engine is
switched off. Note: The symbol on
the ACC panel goes out if the heat-
ing is turned off automatically by the
system.
The rear window and door mirror
heating is controlled automatically.
This is one of the Default Settings.
MEDIUM SPEED:
Normalautomaticfanspeed. This is
one of the Default Settings.
LOW SPEED:
MANUAL:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is switched on with
the button on ACC panel.
This selection give a slightly lower
fan speed than MEDIUM SPEED
though with continued automatic
regulation.
Convertible: The rear window heating
cannot be turned on when the soft top is
folded.
MANUAL:
Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated
automatically when the soft top is open.
See Electric heating, front seats 3
on page 113.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Instruments and controls
A/C Mode
Dual/Single Zone
Auto:
Dual zone:
Automatic engagement and disen-
gagement of the A/C. This is one of
the Default Settings.
Individual temperature setting for
each zone (see page 108). The sys-
tem saves the settings when the
engine is switched off. This is one of
the Default Settings.
A/C off:
A/C compressor OFF (see also
page 110). The A/C compressor
can be activated temporarily by
pressing the AC or AUTO button
while on the road and if the outside
temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).
The A/C will be off the next time the
engine is started, if the engine has
been switched off for more than
2 hours.
Single zone:
Common temperature setting when
the engine is started. If the temper-
aturesettingforthepassengerzone
ischanged, thesystemwillswitchto
Dual zone control. Single zone con-
trol will return the next time the
engine is started having been
switched off for more than 2 hours.
Convertible: The A/C compressor is
switched off when the soft top is folded
down.
Further customizations to this function can
be made at a workshop. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
• The A/C compressor can be on even
when the soft top is folded down.
• The A/C compressor can be set to
operate as when the soft top was last
folded down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 117
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment __________ 118
Electric windows_______ 119
Rearview mirrors_______ 122
Moonroof 3 ___________ 128
Interior lighting ________ 131
Cup holder 3 __________ 132
Power Outlet 3 ________ 134
Storage compartments__ 134
Trunk ________________ 136
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment
WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel while the
car is stationary so that you are not
distracted from the traffic.
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be adjusted.
There is a release lever under the steering
column.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment
Horn signal
1 Pull down the lever to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
Activate the horn by pressing one of the
three areas shown above on the steering
wheel pad.
3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
lock the steering wheel in position.
When returning the release lever to its
locked position, you may need to adjust the
position of the steering wheel slightly to
allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-
rectly.
Steering wheel lock, see page 152.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 119
Electric windows
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric windows, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
Window switches
Window switch in rear door
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
Windows having the automatic closingfunc-
tion (option) can be operated as long as the
car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
Comfort opening 3
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the moonroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional moonroof start to open (approx.
2 s).
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
To open
Press down the front edge of the button one
step.
The electric windows are operated by
means of switches in the door armrests.
During comfort opening of the windows,
moonroof 3 and soft top (Convertible), the
range is reduced by approximately half.
The window will stop when it is fully open or
when the button is released.
For theelectricwindowstowork, theremote
control must be in the ON position in the
ignition switch.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
the way down and release it.
Convertible: For the remote opening 3 of
the soft top, refer to page 64.
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
windows, so long as neither of the front
doors has been opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Interior equipment
To close
Pinch protection 3
On certain model variants, the front electric
windows are equipped with pinch protec-
tion. This is activated if something gets
trappedbetweenthewindowpaneanddoor
frame when the window is closed. The
window will stop and lower slightly.
WARNING
Take care when closing a window to
ensure that no one gets caught.
Raise the front edge of the button one step.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
The window will stop when it is fully closed
or when the button is released.
WARNING
Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all
the way and release it. If the window does
not close automatically, refer to Calibration
on page 121.
Button for temporary deactivation of rear
door window switches and temporary
override of window pinch protection
Make sure nothing obstructs the window
when it is closed without pinch protection.
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (the
window cannot be closed), the pinch protec-
tion can be temporarily disengaged and the
window closed.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the
button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the window in question.
The pinch protection will be active the next
time a window is operated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 121
Calibration is performed as follows:
1 Close the doors.
Calibration
Deactivating the rear window
switches
2 The car must be running at idling speed.
The battery charger must not be
connected to the car’s battery during
calibration.
3 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time.
WARNING
The
in the driver’s door deactivates the
window switches in the rear doors.
The pinch protection will not be engaged
after a power break until the electric
windows have been calibrated.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to orange (deactivated).
4 Close the window fully, the button must
be kept raised the whole time and for
approx. 1 second after the window has
closed.
5 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time and
for approx. 1 second after the window
has fully opened.
The front electric windows should be cali-
brated if automatic closing does not work or
if the battery has been disconnected. The
pinch protection 3 will not work if the win-
dows are not calibrated.
6 Close the window fully, and keep the
button raised until the calibration is
confirmed with a "chime".
Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which
require calibration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Interior equipment
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
To adjust
The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
and heated. The controls for adjusting the
mirrors are on the driver’s door:
1 Select a door mirror with the upper
button.
2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
Retracting a door mirror
1 Selection of mirror
2 Touch pad for adjustment
3 Reversing position 3
Themirrorheatingisturnedontogetherwith
the rear window heating.
Manual retraction
Reversing position 3
If the car has an electrically adjustable
driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
settings are stored in the memory (see
page 20).
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. The mirrors can also be
retractedmanually.Thiscanbeusefulwhen
parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
deckofaferry.Remembertoreturnthedoor
mirrors to their normal positions before
driving off.
On certain model variants, the passenger-
side mirror glass can be angled down to
facilitate reversing. Press the
button
shown in the illustration. This is located
under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
normal position by pressing the button
again. The mirror will also return to its
normal position if you drive forward approx-
imately 22 yds. (20 meters).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 123
Interior rearview mirror with
autodimming 3
The system is activated when the forward-
facing sensor detects that it is dark outside
and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
is then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
The autodimming function can be turned
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe
rear-view mirror.
Mirror position lever
1 Normal position
2 Antidazzle position
Mirror with autodimming
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 Autodimming ON/OFF
3 Rear-facing sensor
Note!
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
shaded by the trailer.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is of the auto-
dimming type and can be deflected with the
leveronitsunderside. Certainvariantshave
an autodimming rearview mirror.
The lever should be in the normal position
when you adjust the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Interior equipment
Preparations for first-time programming
Interior rearview mirror with
garage opener, autodimming
function and compass 3
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
holdforlongerthat 30 seconds. Thegarage
opener is now in the train(orlearning)mode
and can be programmed at any time begin-
ning with "Programming" - step 2.
WARNING
Makesurethat peopleandobjectsareout
of the way of moving door or gate to
prevent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Programming
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" -
step three.
Retain your original garage door opener
(transmitter) for future programming proce-
dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed garage opener buttons be
erased for security purposes, see
page 126.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
do not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 125
from the button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
The transmitter should face the mirror
from below or left side of the mirror.
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen and hand-held transmitter
buttons. Do not release the buttons
until step 5 has been completed.
7 At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission -
which may not be long enough for the
garage opener to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
Note: Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to replace
this Programming Step 4 with procedures
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming" section.
5 After the indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
both the mirror and hand-held transmit-
ter buttons.
6 Press and hold the just-trained button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is
complete and your device should acti-
vate when the button is pressed and
released.
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step nine.
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed button. Repeat the
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator by
using the "Programming" procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
"Programming " step 4 with the following:
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
The garage opener should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
Note: Ifprogrammingagaragedooropener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the "cycling" process to pre-
vent possible overheating.
Continue to press and hold the button while
you press and release - every two sec-
onds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter
until the frequency signal has successfully
been accepted by the garage opener. (The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rap-
idly.)
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
Proceed with "Programming" step five to
complete.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant
light continue with "Programming"
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Interior equipment
Opening a garage door
NOTICE
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occurforthetraineddevice(i.e.garagedoor
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while
programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
NOT release the button.
2 Theindicatorlightwillbegintoflashafter
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, proceed with "Programming" -
step 3.
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
Erasing the three buttons
To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
Autodimming
Pressbutton5brieflytoswitchautodimming
onoroff.Whenautodimmingisswitchedon,
a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-
dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
switchedoff. Seepage 123foradescription
of operation.
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with "Program-
ming" - step 3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 127
Compass
The compass is built into the rearview mir-
ror.Thecompassbearingisdisplayedinthe
top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-
tration on page 126.
Changing zones
Theearth’smagneticfieldvariesdepending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged
to ensure a correct bearing.
Compass zones in USA
Compass zones in Canada
Calibration
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number is now also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
needed perform as follows:
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Interior equipment
Moonroof 3
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the electric moonroof. Risk of serious
or fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric moonroof, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
Moonroof control
3 Manually controlled closing
4 Automatic closing
1 Manually controlled opening
2 Automatic opening
• The person operating the electric
moonroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
opening, before closing the moonroof.
5 Ventilation position
Moonroof without automatic opening
To open
Manually controlled opening
Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
illustration). The moonroof will stop when
you release the control or once it is fully
open.
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Slidethecontrolrearwardtoitsfirstposition.
The moonroof will halt when you release the
control. If you do not release the control, the
moonroof will open to the comfort position.
To open the moonroof further, release the
control and then once again press it rear-
ward.
The moonroof is operated by the control in
the roof console. For the moonroof to work,
the remote control must be in the ON posi-
tion in the ignition switch.
If the car is equipped with windows having
the automatic closing function, the moon-
roof can be opened and closed so long as
the car is unlocked until 20 minutes has
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
Automatic opening
Slide the control rearward to the second
position and release it. The moonroof will
open to the comfort position. To open the
moonroof further, slide the control rearward
a second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 129
Ventilation position (rear edge of moon-
roof open)
• To open – press in the control.
• To close – slide the control forward to the
second position.
To close
Comfort opening 3
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the moonroof.
WARNING
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional moonroof start to open (approx.
2 s).
Exercise great care when closing the
moonroof to ensure that nothing gets
trapped.
It is also possible to select the ventilation
position when the moonroof is open by
pressing in the control. The moonroof will
then close automatically. Press the control
once more to open the moonroof to its ven-
tilation position.
During comfort opening of the windows,
moonroof (option) and soft top, the range is
reduced by approximately half.
Manually controlled closing
Slide the control forward to its first position.
Themoonroofwillhaltwhenyoureleasethe
control.
If the moonroof is in the ventilation position,
it will not open.
If you wish to open the moonroof fully from
the ventilation position, you must first close
it (slide the control forward). You can then
slide the control rearward to open the moon-
roof.
Convertible: For the remote opening of the
soft top, refer to page 64.
Automatic closing 3
Slide the control forward to its second posi-
tion and release it. The moonroof will close
fully.
The moonroof incorporates an interior,
manual, sliding sun blind.
Themoonroofpinchprotectionhaltsclosing
and opens the moonroof slightly if some-
thing obstructs closing.
Moonroof without automatic closing 3
• To open – press the control up.
• To close – slide the control forward to
position 3.
Moonroof without automatic closing 3
Slide the control forward to position 3 (see
illustration). The moonroof will stop when
you release the control or once it is fully
closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Interior equipment
Pinch protection 3
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the moon-
roof when it is closed without pinch
protection.
The moonroof is equipped with pinch pro-
tection. This is activated if something gets
trapped whenthemoonroof isbeingclosed.
The moonroof will stop and open slightly.
Button for overriding the moonroof pinch
protection
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
Emergency operation of the
moonroof
In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-
trical failure, the moonroof can be operated
with a screwdriver.
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in
(moonroof cannot be closed), the pinch pro-
tection can be temporarily disengaged.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
Remove thelens from theroof console. Use
a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
screwdriver.
2 Press and hold the
button on the
driver’s door whileoperating the window
in question.
Turn clockwise to close the moonroof when
in ventilation position.
3 Close the moonroof with the button on
the roof console.
Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
open position.
The pinch protection will be operative the
next time the moonroof is operated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 131
Rear lighting
1 Reading lights
2 Roof light
1 Interior lighting always off
2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
3 Interior lighting on continuously
interior lighting will be switched off automat-
ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.
When the switch is in the mid-position(door-
activated), the interior lighting will come on:
Interior lighting
The glovebox lightingis switched on andoff
automatically when the glove box is opened
and closed.
• When the car is unlocked.
• When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
• When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
Theinteriorlightingconsistsofonefrontand
one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour-
tesy lights in the doors (certain variants
only). The light switch for the interiorlighting
is located on the roof console by the rear-
view mirror.
The lighting goes out:
• When the car is locked.
• When the ignition is turned on.
• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open and the light switch is in
position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting is switched on and off
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
Cup holder 3
WARNING
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
• The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china or glass as
these can cause personal injury in the
event of a crash.
• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
or aluminium cans.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
Sun visor with vanity mirror
NOTICE
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
the cover is raised.
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system , the ignition switch or the
like when using the cup holders. Soft
drinks in particular can cause malfunc-
tions.
Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
the center console compartment between
the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
Sedan and SportCombi). The cup holder
between the seats can be raised if you wish
to use the compartment for storage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 133
Cup holder in fascia
Cup holder in center console compart-
ment between front seats 3
Cup holder in rear seat cushion 3, Sport
Sedan and SportCombi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Interior equipment
Power Outlet 3
Storage compartments
You can use the electrical socket in the stor-
age compartment under the armrest
between the front seats to charge a mobile
phone, for example. There is a recess on
each side of the compartment which will
accept a lead so that you can close the lid
without damaging the charger lead.
WARNING
The glove box must be closed while trav-
elling. An open glove box door could
cause personal injury in the event of a
crash.
There are additional storage compartments
below the front ashtray and in the doors.
WARNING
The maximum output of the cigarette
lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
ofthesocketinthecompartmentbetween
the seats is the same. Overloading can
result in melting or even fire.
Open the glove box with the button on the
left of the moulding.
Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
the traditionally key, see page 54.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 135
Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold
air 3.
Card holder
Storage compartment between front seats
This allows the storage of chocolate dur-
ing hot weather for example.
Storage pocket on front edge of seats 3
Storage pocket on back of seats 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Interior equipment
Trunk
Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.
WARNING
• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Neverplaceheavyobjectsontheparcelshelf.Thereisalways
a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash. See also page 194.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-
wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
during heavy breaking or a crash.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 137
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
the wide part can be folded down separately.
Nexttothehingesinthetrunkarehandlesforunlockingtherearseat
backrests.
The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
trunk.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
not get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ingmessageisdisplayedontheSID(equivalentmessagedisplayed
for right-hand backrest):
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
Trunk Release Handle, see page 139.
Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, Sport Sedan, see
page 140.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Interior equipment
Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.
WARNING
• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
Thereisalockontherearsideofthehatch. Usethistolockorunlock
the hatch.
To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
hatch is now locked.
To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 139
WARNING
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
smaller and lighter bags on top.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using
the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake
suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Secure small items if the backrest is
folded down. Small items can also be
thrown around inside the car and
cause personal injury.
Trunk Release Handle
Tie down eyes in the trunk
• The elastic cargo net 3 is only
designedforlightobjectsthataretobe
kept in place while driving
Trunk Release Handle
Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
• Elasticcargonet 3:WARNING.Avoid
eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.
ALWAYS keep face and body out of
recoil path. DO NOT use when strap
has visible signs of wear or damage.
NOTICE
• The rear seat must be in the upright
position to protect against load
displacement in the event of a crash.
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
Ontheundersideoftheparcelshelfisalight
that is switched on and off when the trunk is
opened and closed.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the
car, as this will alter its handling char-
acteristics (see page 280).
• Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Cover over emergency opening lever, on
parcel shelf
Emergency opening of the
narrow backrest, Sport Sedan
The narrow section of the backrest can be
opened inan emergency if thecar is without
electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
and you need to access the trunk for a warn-
ing triangle, for example.
• Removethecover anddepresstheyellow
lever forward.
Tools and spare wheel, see page 254.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 141
Folding down the rear seat backrest, SportCombi
WARNING
• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that
it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not
be visible. Also make sure that the seatbelt does not get caught.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ingmessageisdisplayedontheSID(equivalentmessagedisplayed
for right-hand backrest):
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the
wide part can be folded down separately.
It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are
slid forward.
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.
An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Interior equipment
WARNING
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags on
top.
• Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT
overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path.
DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
• Secureheavyandbulkyitemsusingthelashingeyesprovided
in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage flying around
if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items
can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal
injury.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 143
Load-through hatch, SportCombi
WARNING
• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 280).
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Interior equipment
Tie down eyes, SportCombi
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
WARNING
• Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
Driving with the trunk lid open, see
page 194.
• Never stack cargo so high that any
part of the cargo lies above the edge
of the backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is
not being used.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance manoeu-
vres and in the event of a crash.
• Use the lashing eyes and suitable
anchorage straps 3 for optimum
securing of loads.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the cargo straps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 145
Cargo net 3
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat
foldeddownwhendrivingwithaheavy
load, because the anchoring possibili-
ties are restricted when the rear seat
is in this position. That the rear seat
is in the upright is a basic require-
ment for protection against cargo
displacement in the event of a
crash.
WARNING
• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the
elastic breaks this may cause
personalinjury. Donotuseacargonet
that shows signs of wear.
• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and
elasticsidenet 3 whentherearseatis
folded down. These nets are only
intended to keep light objects tidy, not
for the anchoring of loads.
• Improve safety by fastening the outer
seatbelts. Check that the red "indica-
tor-flag"nexttotheopeninghandlesis
not visible. If the red "indicator-flag" is
visible the backrest is not locked.
• Secure the load in the luggage
compartment firmly. Usingacargonet
is not considered as load securing.
• Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
• The only purpose of a cargo net is to
prevent light objects from being
thrown forward into the cabin during
heavy breaking.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg)
corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1,000 kg) in a front-end collision at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight and the axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 280.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Interior equipment
Cargo net, vertical 3, SportCombi
Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.
1 Remove the rear cover panels in the
roof.
2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two
rear attachment points in the roof.
3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two
anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.
Tension the straps.
The cargo net can also be fitted behind the
front seats when the whole rear seat is
folded.
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye
1 Remove the front cover panels in the
roof.
2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the
two front attachment points in the roof.
3 Lengthen the straps with the enclosed
extrastraps. Securethehooksinthetwo
outer eyes furthest back on the front
seats’ rails down by the floor. Tension
the straps.
Storing the cargo net
Storage
When the cargo net is not in use it should be
stored in the bag supplied. Position the bag
on the floor in the luggage compartment,
closest to the backrest and secure it in the
front anchorage eyes using the Velcro fas-
teners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 147
Cargo net, floor mounted 3, SportCombi
1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of
the floor in the slots in the side pieces.
2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and
secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up
floor.
Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
bands are not twisted
Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
with subwoofer 3
1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
bands are not twisted
2 Lower anchorage point
2 Lower anchorage point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Interior equipment
Cargo guard 3, SportCombi
NOTICE
Do not place any objects on the extended
cargo guard. It is designed to shield
against view and not for storage.
To fit
1 Hold the cartridge so that the extendible
part faces backward.
2 Position the cartridge over the pin (1) on
the left and right-hand sides. Press the
cartridge down and rotate it slightly
forward until a click is heard.
Fitting the cargo guard
1 Pin on which the cargo guard is fitted
2 Handle for removing the cargo guard
Opening the cargo guard
3 Check the fitting by pulling the cartridge
up, it should now be fitted firmly.
To remove
Opening the cargo guard
1 Retract the cargo guard into the
cartridge.
2 Pull the handle (2) back and lift up the
cartridge. Repeat this on the other side.
The cargo guard can be opened halfway in
order to facilitate loading objects into the
luggage compartment (and to avoid stretch-
ing in over the luggage compartment to
reach the cargo guard).
WARNING
A cassette that is incorrectly fitted can
detach and cause personal injury in the
event of a collision, heavy breaking or
similar.
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Press the rear lip of the cargo guard
down, e.g. with an elbow. The cargo
guard now opens halfway so that
objects can be more easily loaded into
the luggage compartment.
3 Pull the cargo guard down to the lower
position
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 149
Starting and driving
Ignition switch ________
Steering wheel lock____
Starting the engine ____
Important considerations
for driving __________
Refueling ____________
Engine Break-in Period_
Manual transmission___
Automatic
transmission 3 ______
Cruise control ________
Braking______________
Traction Control System
(TCS) ______________
150
152
152
Economical driving_____ 183
Driving in cold weather__ 185
Driving in hot climates __ 187
Towing a trailer 3 ______ 188
Driving with a roof rack
load ________________ 192
Driving with a load _____ 194
Driving with the trunk lid
open________________ 194
Driving in deep water ___ 194
Driving at night ________ 195
Towing the car_________ 195
Jump starting _________ 198
For long trips__________ 200
154
157
161
162
163
169
170
173
Electronic Stability
®
Program (ESP ) 3 ___
175
177
177
Parking brake_________
Parking______________
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Saab Parking
Assistance 3________
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Starting and driving
Ignition switch
WARNING
The ignition switch is located on the center
console between the front seats. In cars
with automatic transmission, the remote
control can only be removed when the
selector lever is in position P.
• Always remove the remote control
before leaving children unattended in
the car.
• Apply the parking brake before remov-
ing the remote control.
LOCK position
The parking lights, hazard warning lights
and interior lighting can be turned on.
NOTICE
• Never remove the remote control
while the car is moving. This will acti-
vate thesteeringwheel lockandmake
it impossible to steer the car.
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
Cars with automatic transmission: Move
the gear lever to P.
The gear lever is locked in position. This is
the only position in which the remote control
can be removed.
If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
switch and melts, the ignition switch can
seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
before getting into the car.
To allow the various systems in the car time
to register that the remote control has been
inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
the remote control for roughly half a second.
Cars with manual transmission: The
remote control can be removed regardless
of the position of the gear lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 151
OFF position
Parts of the electrical system are operative.
ON position
ST - starter position
The entire electrical system is operative.
Donot leave theremote control inthe ON
position when the engine is not running.
Turn the remote control to the OFF position
to disconnect the electrical system.
The starter motor operates (automatic
transmission: selector lever must be in P or
N) when the remote control is turned to this
position. Whenreleased, theremotecontrol
will spring back to the ON position.
Do not leave the remote control in the
OFFpositionwiththeenginenotrunning
as this could cause the battery to run flat
in a matter of hours.
When you turn the remote control to ON,
some indicator and warning lights will come
on in the main instrument panel. These
should go out after about 3 seconds.
The car has an electronic restart lock. If the
engine fails to start, the remotecontrol must
first be turned back to a position between
OFFandLOCKbeforethestartermotorcan
be operated again.
Cars with automatic transmission: The
gear lever is not locked. See also page 164.
If the remote control is turned from ON to
OFFbeforethecarisstationarythenturning
toLOCK maynot be possible. Inwhichcase
turn the remote control to the ON position
until the ABS lamp goes out, approx. 2 s.
Following which, turn it back to OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Starting and driving
If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
lock, the following message will be
displayed on the SID:
Steering wheel lock
Starting the engine
The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
lock engages when the remote control is
removedfromtheignitionandunlockswhen
the remote controlisinserted. A clickcanbe
heard when the steering wheel lock locks
and unlocks.
WARNING
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
the gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump
forwards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
down. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
Ifthesteeringwheellockmalfunctionswhile
the remote control is in the ignition switch,
this may prevent the removal of the remote
control or prevent the car from being
restarted once the engine has been
switched off.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
not succeed on first attempt you must
remove the remote control before trying
again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
the remote control into the ignition switch.
If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
pressing down the lock buttons on the
doors. Lock the front left door from outside
with the traditional key (see page 50). The
car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.
If the steering wheel lock does not disen-
gageitwillnotbepossibletoturntheremote
control in the ignition switch.
• Cars with automatic transmission:
selectpositionPtoremovetheignition
key. The key can only be removed in
this gear position.
The followingmessage isshown on the SID:
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
Pull out key, turn
steering wheel. Restart.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 153
Cars with automatic transmission
Starting the engine
Useful tips on starting the engine
The selector lever must be in the P or N
Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
before the warning and indicator lights have
gone out.
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
follows:
position.
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
Note! Once the engine has started, the
brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
normal.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
essential that you turn the ignition to
ON before depressing the accelerator).
2 Presstheacceleratortothefloorandrun
the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
will prevent the engine being flooded
(fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
fuel supply).
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
touch the accelerator.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
3 Now start the engine in the normal way
- do not touch the accelerator.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting
the engine.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Starting and driving
2 Stopping the engine
Important
NOTICE
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off - stop the engine
when it is idling.
considerations for
driving
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
malfunction. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer immediately.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
1 Starting and driving
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
• One of the advantages of boost pres-
sure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower
than AON 87. However, engine perfor-
mance will fall slightly and heavy load-
ingandlaboringshouldbeavoided. For
optimum performance, use the recom-
mended grade of fuel.
• Do not use full throttle until the engine
is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
repeatedly enters the red zone, the
engine may suddenly lose power, due
to the initiation of a monitoring system
that limits the boost pressure. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
• Under certain barometric conditions
(high outside temperature and/or high
altitude) the needle may enter the first
part of the red zone without necessarily
indicating that a fault has arisen.
Limited performance.
The light 3 comes on in the event of an
engine or gearboxfault (cars with automatic
gearbox), which can cause drivability prob-
lems. Thecar can stillbe drivenbut perhaps
with limited performance.
• The maximum boost pressure is regu-
lated according to the tendency of the
engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
is perfectly normal. This can occur
when the engine is running at about
3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
extent of this knocking will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
Contact a workshop when you find it suit-
ably. We recommend that you contact an
authorised Saab workshop.
• Aprotectivefunction(interruptionofthe
fuel supply) limits the engine speed.
• Isolated instances of knocking can
occur with low-octane fuel. This
controlled form of knocking, followed
by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
a sign that the control system is work-
ing normally, and is perfectly safe for
the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 155
Limp-home
Important considerations with
catalytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
metal alloy).
NOTICE
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that checks a number of
internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
throttle valve, the engine management
system will set the throttle system to the
limp-home mode. This means:
If
"Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
(indicating thatthe engineis misfiringand
the catalytic converter can be damaged),
ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
should go out or start to shine constantly.
If the light continues to flash despite
easing off the accelerator, you may
continue to drive the car but at the mini-
mum throttle permitted by the current traf-
fic situation. Have the car checked as
soon as possible. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
• idling control will be poor (uneven idling
since regulated by ignition and fuel
supply)
• engine performance will be reduced
• the cruise control will not function
NOTICE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
• thecapacityoftheA/Ccompressor willbe
limited.
Ifthediagnosisfunctiondetectsafaultinthe
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
engine management system, the
light
"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
the instrument panel will come on (see
page 83). Have the car checked at a work-
shop as soon as possible. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Starting and driving
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program.
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could there-
fore start a fire.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to a workshop. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
• If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
or if the battery is flat), the car can be
bump started (manual transmission only)
or started using jump leads to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
switch off the engine to avoid serious
damage to the catalytic converter. We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer for advice.
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you bump start the car when the engine
isalreadyatnormalworkingtemperature,
the engine must start to run on all cylin-
ders. Abort bump starting if the engine
fails to start immediately.
Failure to strictly follow these instructions
can result in damage to the catalytic con-
verter and associated components, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
Engine management system with catalytic
converter
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor
3 Catalytic converter
NOTICE
Ifthecarrunsoutofgas,airmaybedrawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
the engine compartment and under the
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
effect that would obtain at the corre-
sponding road speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 157
Refueling
NOTICE
NOTICE
WARNING
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores
fault codes.
Ifyouspillfuelandthensomethingignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
, thus indicating a fault that must be
checked by your Saab dealer, see
page 83.
• Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
• never smoke while refueling.
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
• never use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel.
• gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol illu-
minateswhenlessthanapproximately
2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
in the tank.
• do not use a mobile phone at the
same time as refueling.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
notremovethenozzle. Shutoff theflow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Starting and driving
Refueling
NOTICE
WARNING
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
needed when the temperature rises.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
notremovethenozzle. Shutoff theflow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
• Fill to maximum filling capacity.
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-
hand rear fender.
Filler cap
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while filling is in progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops, and wait a few seconds after
you´ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle.
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
Filler cap
To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
it will spring back to the right.
When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank full.
Refer to page 185 for information regarding
gasoline anti-freeze.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 159
Filling a portable fuel container
WARNING
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
• Gasoline engines – AON 90.
Gasoline Octane
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
is less than 87, you may get a heavy knock-
ing noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. A little pinging noise
when you accelerate or drive uphill is con-
sidered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-
ing, your engine needs service.
When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed or on any surface other than the
ground.
The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
ring on the cap into the slot.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operat-
ing the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is complete.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
togettherighttype. Yourdealercangetone
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly.
• Do not smoke while pumping gaso-
line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Starting and driving
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
Additives
It is recommended that gasoline meet spec-
ifications which were developed by automo-
bile manufacturers around the world and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
which is available from the Alliance of Auto-
mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli-
ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet-
ing these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other
gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California speci-
fications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 83. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
your emission control system to work prop-
erly. You should not have to add anything to
yourfuel.However, somegasolinescontain
only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-
mends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-
ences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-
lines may be available in your area to con-
tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-
rode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be cov-
ered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy gasoline
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 161
whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Wearing in new brake pads
Engine Break-in Period
Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
surfaces.
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
Themalfunctionindicator lampmayturnon.
Ifthisoccurs,returntoyourauthorizedSaab
dealer for service.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
If you plan on driving in another country out-
side the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom-
mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Starting and driving
Manual transmission
Clutch interlock
To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
depressed.
When changing gear, fully depress the
clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
isinadvisabletodrivewithyourhandresting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.
Gear positions, 5-speed
Gear positions, 6-speed
NOTICE
When reverse gear is to be engaged,
the car must be at a standstill with
the accelerator fully released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 163
Automatic
transmission 3
WARNING
Indication of gear position on main
instrument panel
• Depressthebrakepedalwhenshifting
the selector lever from P or N.
• The car must be at a standstill before
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in the P or N position.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be idling when you move the selector lever
from one position to another. If not, the
transmission could be damaged.
Selector lever
1 Position for manual gear selection
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
NOTICE
The remote control can only be removed
when the selector lever is in the P position.
After selecting a drive position, pause
brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
The automatic transmission has an elec-
tronic control module. The control module
receives information including accelerator
position and road speed. Using this and
other information, it controls the hydraulic
pressure of the transmission to ensure that
gear changing is as smooth as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Starting and driving
Adaptive gear change patterns
Thermal transmission protection
The adaptive gear change pattern function
adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv-
ing conditions. The transmission control
module senses the engine load, vehicle
speed and temperature of the transmission.
A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sarygearchangesandundesiredincreases
in transmission temperature.
The transmission has built-in protection
against overheating. If the temperature of
the transmission fluid exceeds 302°F
(150°C), engine torque will be limited to
147 ft.lbs. (200 Nm).
The followingmessage isshown on the SID:
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
Certain variants use a special change pat-
ternforthefirstfew minutesafteracoldstart
so that the catalytic converter reaches its
working temperature more quickly.
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
Selector lever detent
Park Brake Shift Lock
Lock-up
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-
tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
must be pressed in at the same time as the
brake pedal is held depressed.
The transmission’s torque converter has a
lock-up function. This can lock the torque
converter, thus reducing the engine speed
and fuel consumption.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
a down change is made to optimize acceler-
ation, e.g. for overtaking.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed in before the lever can be
moved between certain positions.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock, see page 166.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed,
unless you ease off the accelerator before
reaching this.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 165
Driving in hilly country with a
heavy load
Towing
Limp-home
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,
see page 195.
NOTICE
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive with the selector lever in the D posi-
tion. Theadaptivegear changepatternsare
then active.
Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is
engaged.
Descending hills
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down. If you desire more powerful
engine braking, manually select a lower
gear (see page 168).
If the transmission malfunctions, the control
module will activate limp-home mode. Driv-
ability will be affected to varying degrees.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid.
The followingmessage isshown on the SID:
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
WARNING
Remember tousethebrakingeffectofthe
engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you
are descending long or steep hills to
spare the brakes.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Starting and driving
Cars with 5-speed transmission
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
2nd gearmustbeselectedmanually. Select
5th gear manually or move the selector
lever to D, see page 168.
NOTICE
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector lever out of
the park position, even if the ignition is
ON. If for some reason the selector lever
has to be moved out of the park position
(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
described below.
Cars with 6-speed transmission 3
• The car may be totally powerless. If this is
case, have the car transported to a work-
shop to have the problem rectified.
• The car may feel weak but can be driven
carefully to a workshop to have the prob-
lem rectified.
1 Apply the parking brake.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
compartment ahead of the selector
lever.
• Drivability may barely be affected.
Irrespective of the drivability of the car, the
car must be taken to a workshop to have the
problem checked and rectified.
3 Under the floor of the storage compart-
ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
hold the plastic lever while moving the
selector lever from P to N.
4 Remove the tool.
5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately, otherwise it
should remain on.
Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
Contact a workshop to have the problem
checked and rectified. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 167
Selector lever positions
N
You must press the brake pedal to move
the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
Inneutral,thetransmissionisdisengagedfromthe
engine. The engine can be started but make sure
the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
movement.
P
The selector lever is locked and the transmission
is mechanically blocked.
The engine can be started.
To move the selector lever out of the P position,
depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
(catch) on the selector lever.
Only select the park position (P) when the car is
stationary.
To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
theengine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
position (D).
R
Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
stationary. The detent release button must be
pressed before the selector lever can be moved
to R.
D
Thedriveposition(D) isthenormaloneforforward
driving. The transmission shifts automatically
between all gears from 1st to 5th or 6th, the timing
of which depends on factors such as the current
accelerator position and the speed of the car.
Pause for a moment before applying the acce-
lerator, to allow the gears to engage.
Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
touching the accelerator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Starting and driving
Sentronic, manual gear selection
Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
(to the left position D) to select gear manually.
Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
the letter M after each gear change.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enableyou toremainina low gear foran extended
period of time.
Iftheroadsurfaceisslippery,youmaywishtostart
off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
Steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection 3
When descending steep hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-
ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
position.
Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-
erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
gear by pressing the left-hand button.
When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
enough to avoid overrevving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 169
To set the desired speed
1 Slide the switch to ON.
2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
SET/– when the car has reached the
desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
h)).
Cruise control
(Cruise control system)
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system in
wetor icyconditions, indense trafficoron
winding roads.
To increase the preset speed
You can increase the speed in any of
the following ways:
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion), the brakes must be applied once
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
control already engaged).
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/+positionuntil
the desired speed is reached (when
cruise control already engaged).
Cruise control switches
The followingmessage isshown on the SID:
The system has the following functions:
Tap brakes lightly
before using cruise ctrl.
1 ON: engaged
2 OFF: disengaged
3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
the set speed
4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
the set speed
5 RESUME:re-engagesthesystematthe
set speed
The CRUISE indicator light in the main
instrument panel comes onwhentheswitch
is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
while the cruise control is ON, the system
will be ON the next time the engine is
started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Starting and driving
To reduce the preset speed
You can reduce speed in any of the follow-
ing ways:
To re-engage the system
Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
Braking
It is good practice to try your brakes period-
ically while driving. This is particularly
important when driving in heavy rain, on
roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly now and again. This
should also be done after the car has been
washed, and in extremely damp weather.
• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/–positionuntil
the desired speed is reached.
To disengage the system
The system will be disengaged:
• As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed (cars with manual transmis-
sion).
• When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
also heading "To disengage the system
temporarily".
Temporary increase in speed
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
such as when negotiating long descents
with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-
dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
braking effect of the engine. If the car has
automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
gear.
Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
transmission),toexceedthesetspeedsuch
as for overtaking. When you release the
accelerator, the car will return to the set
speed.
• When the switch is slid to OFF.
®
• When the TCS/ESP system is opera-
tive.
• When position N is selected (cars with
automatic transmission).
To disengage the system
temporarily
Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
only as far as to disengage the cruise con-
trol. Allow the switch to spring back.
Youcanhelptoprolongthelifeofthebrakes
by thinking ahead and braking harder over
short periods, rather than braking more
moderately over long stretches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 171
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-
butes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s speed or load.
ABS brakes
WARNING
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin
heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon
the road, in snow, on a wet road
surface or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, thebrakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
which will switch on the ABS warning light
if a fault is detected in the system (see
page 82).
• Tostop asquickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,
press the brake pedal down hard
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
The following message will appear on the
SID (and corresponding symbol on main
instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
neously, and steer the car to safety.
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand
dry.
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-
lates the brake pressureto each wheel. The
pressure is automatically reduced just
before the wheel locks up and then
increases again to the point at which the
wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-
sors send information to the brake system’s
electronic control module for every 4 or so
inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
information is processed continuously to
ensure that the adjustment of the brake
pressure will be as exact as possible.
Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
second.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe
engine is off, (e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
• Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Starting and driving
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-
ing control is retained.
WhentheABSsystemoperatesyouwillfeel
the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-
essary steer to safety.
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
Braking with ABS brakes.
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
Indication that the system is operating:
pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise
The above is critical.
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the brake pedal. This means that
the driver can brake gently to test the condi-
tion of the road and adapt their driving
accordingly.
It is well worth practising the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 173
The TCS uses information from the ABS
wheel sensorstodetect when the front(driv-
ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
wheels.
TCS OFF
Traction Control
System (TCS)
Anti-spin system
lights up if:
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• there is a fault in the ABS system
• the system has been switched off
manually.
If the two front wheels are rotating faster
than the rear wheels, the torque from the
engine is reduced to eliminate the differ-
ence.
WARNING
When driving normally, the TCS system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The TCS must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
The advantages of the TCS become most
apparent when the cohesion between the
front wheels and the road surface is so low
that one or both of the wheels would lose
their grip were the car not equipped with the
TCS, e.g.:
How the system works
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different
surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
the TCS functions like an electronic differ-
ential lock, making sure that both wheels
rotate at the same speed. The system
also functions when the car is reversing.
The Traction Control System (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
• When cornering, if the inside front wheel
rotates faster than the other wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Starting and driving
If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
be switched off automatically.
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
The followingmessage isshown on the SID:
Youcanswitchthesystemoff manuallywith
Traction control failure.
Contact service.
the TCS button
, whereupon the
light will come on. The TCS cannot be
switchedoffifthecaristravellingfasterthan
35 mph (60 km/h).
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
operative.
It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
TCS button
TCS indicator
WhentheremotecontrolisturnedtotheON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
The
light comes on when the TCS is
operative, that is when one of the wheels
has lost its grip.
The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
thatthelimitforgriphasbeenexceededand
that the driver must exercise greater care.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 175
How the ESP® system works
TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
Electronic Stability
®
Program (ESP ) 3
Anti-skid system
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure
wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
steering wheel position and braking pres-
sure. The values provided by these sensors
are used to calculate the actual direction of
the car, the intentions of the driver and
WARNING
®
When driving normally, the ESP system
helps to improve the car’s directional
®
stability. The ESP must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads
must be adopted.
®
whether the ESP should be engaged.
If this direction does not agree with that
intended by the driver, calculated from the
®
steering wheel position, the ESP is
engaged.
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
system that helps the driver to stabilize the
car in unusual circumstances that can oth-
erwise be more difficult to handle.
Illustration of how the system applies the
brakes on one or several wheels in order
to reduce the likelihood of the car skidding
®
The ESP improves the driver’s chances
of retaining control over the car in a critical
situation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Starting and driving
ESP® indicator light
When theremotecontrolis turnedtotheON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
If a fault is detected in the system, the
following message will be displayed on
the SID:
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
The
light comes on for a short period of
®
time when the ESP system is operative.
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the ESP is
operative.
®
®
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver during continued driving.
NOTICE
Turning ESP® system off
The system can be turned off manually with
®
ESP button
Changes to the chassis, such as a
change of wheels, shock absorbers or
springs, could affect the function of the
®
the ESP button
, whereupon the
ESP® OFF
®
ESP system.
light will comeon. The car must be trav-
elling slower than 35 mph (60 km/h). The
TCS is also disengaged.
Always consultaworkshop before chang-
ing any chassis components. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
lights up if:
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• the system has been switched off
manually
®
The ESP is always engaged during brak-
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-
®
ally with the ESP button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 177
Parking brake
Parking
WARNING
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car. If the car is to be
left parked for a long time, refer to
page 179.
• Never leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Always apply the parking brake
• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
before removing the remote control.
• Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
• Do not park on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot andcouldstart
a fire.
Correct hold
• Grasp the parking brake lever in such
awaythatnofingersgettrappedwhen
you release the parking brake.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
• Apply the parking brake, remove the
remote control and lock the car.
The parking brake lever is situated between
the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
Release park brake.
the
indicator light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, pull the releasebuttononthe under-
side of the lever and lower the lever.
If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
as little as necessary so as to stop the car
from rolling, when the parking brake is
applied.
To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
depress the brake pedal. This is especially
appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Starting and driving
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
the car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-
ous parking space.
1 Downhill with curb.
Turn the wheels toward
thecurbandedgethecar
forwards until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
2 Uphill with curb. Turn
thewheelsawayfromthe
curb and edge the car
backward until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
3 Uphill or downhill with-
out curb. Turn the wheel
towards the edge of the
road so that the car,
should it move, will not
roll towards the middle of
the road.
• Thieves strike whenever and wher-
ever they are given the opportunity.
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 179
• Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
ventilated building. Leave the parking
brake OFF!
• Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
top should be closed.
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. three tofour months, the following
steps are recommended:
• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
the parking brake off.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
and lubricate them with glycerol
(glycerine).
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the storage
period, remove the battery and store it in
a frost-free place.
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
the road and applying the brakes a few
times.
• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
forming in it.
• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
stands, increase the tire pressure to
43 psi (3 bar).
Leave all the door windows open a crack
and cover the car with a non-plastic
tarpaulin–notonemadeofplasticwhichwill
not breath.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance 3
Saab Parking Assistance
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• The parking assistance system can
facilitate parking and reversing.
• Bear in mind that small objects, such
as a child lying on the ground, and
narrow objects cannot always be
detected by the system.
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects, such as a post, since the surface
area presented to the car is too small.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
confirmation is given and the following text
is shown on the SID:
Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in the
rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
(1.8 meters) behind the car.
Parking assistance
active
If the car is heavily laden, the system may
falsely indicate that there is an object within
the detection range. This is since the sen-
sors are angled towards the ground when
the car is tail-heavy.
If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
reminder,isshownontheSIDwhenreverse
is engaged, the audible signals from the
parking assistance system will not be heard
since the warning message has priority.
When the sensors detect an object within
the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
will be heard. Thefrequency of these pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 181
If you stop the car with reverse gear
engaged, the sound pulse will stop after
2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if
you continue to reverse. If the car rolls for-
ward while reverse is engaged, the system
is silenced.
Cars with trailer hitch
NOTICE
If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
correctly connected to the car’s electrical
system, the Saab Parking Assistance auto-
matically compensates for the protrusion of
the tow bar.
The sensors must be kept clean to func-
tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
their sensitivity.
When the distance to the object is less
than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
be heard.
Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
the sensors can prevent the parking
assistance system from detecting any
objects.
If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
the car’s electrics, the system is automati-
cally deactivated.
When an object is approximately 3 ft.
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly (frequency
increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
trunk.
Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
Parking Assistance as follows:
• Engage reverse and press the CLR
button on the SID control panel.
Reversing alongside a wall
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
The system will be reactivated the next time
you engage reverse.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-
nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
the system is automatically deactivated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Starting and driving
Error messages
The system can be switched off using
Explanation of ON and OFF.
Settings.
If the system malfunctions, the following
message will appear on the SID:
ON
1 Select Settings using the steering
Saab Parking Assistance is activated
automatically when reverse is
engaged. The system warns of objects
behind the car.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
connected to the trailer connector, the
system will be deactivated automati-
cally. You can also deactivate the sys-
tem temporarily with the CLR button if
reverse has been engaged and the
system is active.
wheel controls,
2 Press and hold the SET button until
given audible confirmation.
3 Select Park Assistance.
4 Press the SET button.
5 Select ON or OFF.
6 Confirm the setting by pressing the SET
button.
or
.
Parking assistance
malfunction. Service.
If the system is subject to interference, the
following message will be shown on the
SID:
Parking assistance
sensor interference.
Park Assistance
OFF
ON
If this message appears, clean the sensors.
The sensors are located in the black trim on
the rear bumper
Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 183
How to read the diagram:
Economical driving
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
100 km), the actual fuel consumption
3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
Factors affecting fuel
consumption
The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
affected by driving conditions, climate, road
conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.
– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
– 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher during the break-in period (the
first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).
It is clear from the diagram that both dis-
tance driven and outside temperature have
a significant impact on fuel consumption,
after a cold start.
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
Weather conditions
Summer temperatures give better fuel
economy than winter ones. The difference
can be as much as about 10%. Consump-
tion increases in cold weather because the
engine takes longer to reach its normal
operating temperature. The transmission
and wheel bearings also take longer to
warm up. Even distance affects consump-
tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
do not give the engine enough time to
reach its optimum temperature. Wind con-
ditions also have a marked effect on fuel
consumption.
If the car is normally driven on short jour-
neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
and from work, the average consumption
will be 60–80% above the normal level.
Driving techniques
• To obtain the best running economy, with
regard to fuel consumption and general
wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
frequent braking and much changing
down all give higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a camper all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not warm up the engine while the car
is stationary.
If idling, the engine will take much longer
to reach its optimum temperature, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Starting and driving
engine wear is at its greatest during this
period. Drive off as soon as possible after
starting the engine and avoid high engine
speeds.
• Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
possible. Match your driving to the
prevailing traffic conditions.
• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
fuel consumption than driving in a high
gear because of the higher engine speed
for any given road speed. Always shift up
as soon as traffic conditions allow and
drive in the highest gear as much as
possible.
• Check the tire pressure once a month.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
to be slightly high than too low. Under-
pressure increases fuel consumption.
• Check the fuel consumption regularly.
Increased fuel consumption can indicate
that something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.
Engine block heater 3
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
Practicalroadtestshavedemonstratedthat
substantial savings in fuel consumption can
be made if the above advice is followed.
WARNING
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
Thewarmeritisoutside,theshorterthetime
the engine heater needs to be connected.
Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
Never switch off the engine while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
Road conditions
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
this in the trunk.
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 185
• Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
several times before the onset of winter.
This will prevent condensation water in
the fuel tank from freezing and causing
interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-
hood of condensation is lowest when the
fuel tank is full.
If the car is parked outside and the
temperature is below zero, gasoline anti-
freeze is of little use as it cannot remove
water that has already frozen. Park the
car in a warm place so that any ice that
may have built up melts, then add gaso-
line anti-freeze when refueling.
Condensation is caused by temperature
fluctuations, either in the outside temper-
ature alone or when the car is alternately
parked outdoors and in a garage.
• Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
• The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although thishasbeenachieved at
theexpenseofsomewhatreducedgripon
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter tires befitted. However, winter tires
achieve this extra grip at the expense of
grip on bare road surfaces.
Driving in cold weather
In cold weather, special attention should be
paid to the following:
• Before driving off, make sure that the
wiper blades have not frozen to the wind-
shield.
• Remove any snow from the heating
system air intakes between the hood and
the windshield.
• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-
denum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires are
in good condition.
Winter tires, particularly studded tires, gen-
erally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries. Ifwintertiresarefitted, thesame
type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
Saabdealer willbepleasedtoadviseyouon
the best tires for your car.
• For how to check the level of antifreeze in
the engine coolant, see page 209.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Starting and driving
Remember that tires age: it may therefore
be necessary to change winter tires before
they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad-
ually lose their friction properties with age.
Driving with tire chains 3
Snowchainsmustonlybefittedtothewheel
andtiredimensions thatSaabrecommends
in "Technical data" on page 279.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
has a manual transmission, the best
response is to freewheel, which means
declutching so that the wheels neither drive
nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
desired direction.
• Check that the chains do not foul the
wheel arch liner at full lock.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer regarding approved tire chains. See
also page 248.
• Refer to the "Technical data" section
on page 279, for information on wheel
and tire dimensions approved for the
fitting of tire chains.
WARNING
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
off the accelerator slightly and steer cau-
tiously in the desired direction.
• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
• Tire chains can reduce directional
stability.
If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
same direction as the movement of the rear
of the car.
• Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 187
2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
normal temperature is shown (about in
the middle of the scale) before switching
off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
topped up, carefully unscrew the
expansion tank cap.
Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
antifreezeand50 %cleanwater.Usean
antifreeze approved by Saab.
Driving in hot climates
Always check the coolant level before start-
ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the
coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
mark on the expansion tank (boundary
betweentheupperandlowersectionsofthe
tank).
At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone, the following message
will be shown on the SID:
WARNING
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap
Hot engine. Make a
safe stop. Idle engine.
completely when the engine is hot.
• The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapour can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before removing
it.
1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
engine. Do not remove the cap on the
cooling system expansion tank, even if
the tank is empty. The engine tempera-
tureshoulddecrease. Ifthetemperature
continues to rise with the engine idling,
the engine must be switched off.
3 Have the car’s cooling system checked.
WerecommendthatyoucontactaSaab
dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Starting and driving
Trailer hitch attachment 3
Towing a trailer 3
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
with trailer brakes.
WARNING
• Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
steeper than 15 %. The load on the
drive (front) wheels will be so low that
the wheels can start to spin and
prevent further progress.
An electrical connection 3 for the towbar
and an electrical unit are provided in the
electrical centre on the left-hand side of the
luggage compartment.
• In addition, the car’s parking brake
may not always be sufficient to hold
the car and trailer securely, as the
wheels may start to slide.
If the car has a 13-pin Saab genuine electri-
cal socket then it is possible to supply a
trailer/caravan with rear fog lights and
reversing lights. The caravan can also have
interior and exterior lighting even when the
car’s ignition is switched off. In which case,
remember not to load the battery for too
long so that it is discharged and pre-
vents the car from starting.
• Always apply the trailer’s parking
brake when unhitching it. There is
otherwise a risk of personal injury or
damage to the bumper should the
trailer start to roll.
• When you hitch up the trailer be sure
to attach its safety chains to the holes
by the hitch.
Thereisalsoaccesstopowerinthecaravan
duringajourney, thecaravanbatterycanbe
charged for example.
Also, if the car has SPA, this is deactivated
automatically if a trailer is hitched up and
correctly connected to the Saab genuine
trailer socket.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
requirements regarding speed limits for
towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
braking requirements, and also any spe-
cial driving licence provisions.
Saab recommendations:
• Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
designed and tested for your Saab.
• Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
which trailer hitch is designed for your car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 189
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind.
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
NOTICE
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-
ment panel.
• Only use a towbar that has been
approved for your car. We recom-
mend that you entrust towbar installa-
tion to an authorised Saab workshop,
which can also provide important
information such as trailer weight.
Your authorised Saab workshop has
information on how the towbar is to be
installed and whether other measures
must be undertaken that could affect
the cooling system or other equipment
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorder asthe
temperature of the transmission increases:
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
• Gear change pattern is altered
• A/C compressor is switched off
• Max. engine torque is reduced
6-8
3330 (1500) unlimited
3080 (1400) max. 15
2645 (1200) max. 15
2200 (1000) max. 15
9-11
12-14
max. 15
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
• We recommend that you contact a
Saab dealer for guidance on how to
connect a trailer hitch.
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
• Exercise carewhen drivingonuneven
roads or against the curb if the car is
heavilyladen. Thisparticularlyapplies
to cars with 17" wheels.
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
6-8
2200 (1000) unlimited
1760 (800) max. 15
1100 (500) max. 15
880 (400) max. 15
9-11
12-14
max. 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Starting and driving
When continuing your journey, manually
select a low gear in which the engine speed
is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
(see page 168).
Recommendations for cars with
manual transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
WARNING
When the needle is just outside the red
zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
off and, on certain engine variants, the max-
imum engine torque will be limited.
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
brakes when you are driving on a long or
steep downhill slope.
When continuing your journey, select a low
gear in which the engine speed is about
3,500 rpm until the incline eases.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Distribution of load in trailer
WARNING
a Light
b Moderate
c Heavy
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Trailer hitch load
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. With a
two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the load
on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be included in the
total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
may have to be reduced by the correspond-
ing amount.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 191
Checks before driving
Driving considerations
Reversing
Make sure that the car and trailer are in
good working order. This is essential since
towing a trailer increases the strain on the
car.
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking performance reduced. The
trailer’s braking system and suspension
also have a considerable effect on these
characteristics. See also "Driving with a
load" on page 194.
Get someone to help you keep an eye out
behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
always provide sufficient rearward vision
when reversing.
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and trailer.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
Drive carefully:
• Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and trailer is properly secured and
adjusted.
• Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
properlyconnectedandisnotsolongthat
it drags along the ground. Also, make
sure the cable is not too short and risks
breaking when turning a corner.
• descending hills
• on uneven roads
• over railway crossings
• when meeting large vehicles
Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select
gear M1 when ascending or descending
steep hills.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check the car and trailer brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the
camper or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
is raised and locked.
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and trailer are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Starting and driving
Fitting roof carriers 3
Driving with a roof rack
load
Sport Sedan and SportCombi without
roof rails
1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
car.
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
2 Insertascrewwithwasherintoeachroof
carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
3 The roof carriers are marked front and
back.
• Adjust your speed to the prevailing
conditions.
4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
the roof.
5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
mounted.
• Duetohigheraerodynamicsdrag, fuel
economymaysufferwhendrivingwith
a roof rack.
Mounting holes for roof carrier
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
must be included in the car’s maximum per-
missible payload and axle load.
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for your car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
securely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 193
Fitting roof carriers 3
SportCombi with roof rails
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross
members to see which is the front and
which is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
centre supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the
distance between the cross members is
at least 700 mm.
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positionedso that the
tailgate can be opened fully without
hitting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket
so that it lies snugly against the
outside of the roof rail. Make sure that
the roof carriers are seated centrally on
the rubber spacers and that these sit
correctlyontheroofrail.Pullthespacers
down slightly on the inside of the roof
rail.
5 Centre the roof carriers so that they
protrude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Starting and driving
Driving with a load
Thehandlingcharacteristicsareaffectedby
how the car is loaded.
Drivingwiththetrunklid Driving in deep water
open
NOTICE
WARNING
Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
NOTICE
than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
• Place the heaviest load as far forward
and as low as possible in the trunk.
fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
suckedintotheengine. Theenginewillbe
drawn into the cabin.
seriously damaged if water enters the
• Secure the load to the lashing eyes
(see page 139).
intake system.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and set the cabin fan to its high-
est speed setting.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s
center of gravity is further back. As a
result, the car will sway more during
evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load of
the roof box, even if there is room for
more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
– slight overinflation is preferable to
underinflation.
• Thebrakingdistanceofaloadedcaris
always greater. Keep your distance
from the vehicle in front.
• Do not exceed the car’s permissible
gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
page 280).
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
For further information on tires see
page 241.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 195
Front towing eye
Driving at night
Towing the car
Bear in mind the following points, especially
when driving at night:
WARNING
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye is
screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
thread!
• Nighttime driving requires your full
concentration
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
• Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• The towing eye is only designed for
towing the car on roads. It must not
be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
for example.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should snap. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car when it is on tow.
• Never drive with the towing eye fitted
to the front bumper. Return it to its
designated storage space.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be recovered.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON
position if the car is moved with the
engine not running.
• The steering wheel lock must be
disengaged before towing the car.
• Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
dawn.
• The steering wheel lock disengages
when the remote control is inserted
into the ignition switch, if the battery
has sufficient charge.
• Check the headlight levelling setting (see
page 97).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Starting and driving
Front towing eye fitted.
The towing eye has a left-hand thread!
Rear towing eye
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanent towing eye at the
rear under the bumper.
Towing the car
NOTICE
The front towing eye is stowed by the spare
wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper
is a cover concealing the attachment point
(tapped hole) for the towing eye.
If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
be used instead of the towing eye.
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
1 Press the knob on the upper section of
thiscover atthesame timeaspullingout
the lower edge.
2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing
Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
parking lights.
eye has a left-hand thread!
3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to
tighten it properly.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles on tow.
To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top
edge of the cover. Then click in the lower
edge, one corner at a time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 197
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
being jerked violently.
Transporting the car
NOTICE
If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
Cars with automatic transmission:
NOTICE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
Attachment points for anchorage straps
Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
must not be towed at speeds exceeding
30 mph (50 km/h) nor for adistance of more
than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
transported over a longer distance, a tow
truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
Vehicle recovery
If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
truck, or similar, it must be securely
strapped down. There are attachment
points for this purpose on the underside of
the car. The attachment points are oblong
hole that have been reinforced to cope with
the stresses that arise during this type of
transport.
The engine cannot be started by towing or
pushing the car. In an emergency, the
engine can be started as described under
"Jump starting" on page 198.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Starting and driving
Jump starting
NOTICE
NOTICE
WARNING
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery. Therefore, always
avoid sparks and open flames in the
vicinity of the battery.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumpercablescanreach,butbesurethe
vehicles are not touching each other. If
a poor connection on the negative
jumper cable should exist, it is possible
for damage to be caused to electrical
systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
It is essential when a donor battery is to be
used to jump start the car that the jump
leads be connected correctly to prevent
arcing.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
theaffectedarealiberallywithwater. If
acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-
tity makes contact with the skin, seek
medical help.
To jump start your vehicle:
WARNING
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off lights that are not needed, and
radios. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries and it could save
your radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 199
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
the good battery’s negative terminal.
9 Attach the cable to the discharged
battery’s negative terminal.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the
discharged battery. If it does not start
after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jump starting
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
Note. If the current in the low battery is
too low it might be necessary to wait
several minutes with the cables
connected before you can start the
engine with the low battery.
NOTICE
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe
covered by your warranty.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
short that could injure you or would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts as well.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
WARNING
Anelectric fancan startup even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Starting and driving
Using a battery charger 3/starter
For long trips
Before starting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car inspected by
your Saab dealer.
unit
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
the like.
• If the charger or starter unit can be set to
differentvoltages(6V/12V/18V/24V),12V
must be selected.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
• No other apparatus that are grounded or
connected to the mains must be
connected to the car during charging or
jump starting.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
replace if it shows any signs of wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
• 16V continuous
• 18V for 60 min.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
tire.
• Take an extra remote control and keep it
separate.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
If you are unsure about the charge rating of
the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
the positive terminal before connecting the
unit to the battery.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
jack in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 201
Car care
Hood________________
Engine ______________
Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
Engine bay, V6 engine _
Engine oil ____________
Air filter______________
Transmission fluid ____
Coolant______________
202
202
205
206
207
209
209
209
Fuses ________________ 234
Tires _________________ 241
Compact spare ________ 254
Changing a tire ________ 257
Safety belts ___________ 260
Upholstery and trim ____ 260
Textile carpeting _______ 261
Engine bay____________ 261
Washing______________ 261
Waxing and polishing___ 264
Touching up the paint___ 264
Anti-corrosion treatment 265
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads__________
211
212
213
216
217
217
219
Power steering________
Battery ______________
Drive belt ____________
Wipers and washers ___
Wiper blades _________
Changing bulbs _______
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ____________ 267
Air conditioning (A/C)___ 268
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Car care
Hood
Engine
The hood release handle is located on the
left under the instrument panel. Open the
hood in the following way:
Turbo 4-cylinder engine
The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in-
line engine with twin overhead camshafts
and 16 valves.
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-
tion and is stopped by a safety catch at
the front edge.
3 Presstheleverofthecatchupwardsand
raise the hood.
The engine is equipped with two balance-
shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
minimum.
The balance shafts are chain-driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods. The effect occurs
twice in each revolution of the engine, coun-
teractingthe vibration fromitsmovingparts,
and at the same time reducing unwanted
engine noise.
When you close the hood you should drop it
from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
without slamming it.
Hood release handle
The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
from the front), is integrated with the engine.
Hood release catch plate
Turbo V6 engine
The V6 engine is a turbocharged V6 engine
produced completely of aluminium with 60°
between the cylinder banks, 4 valves per
cylinder, 2 camshafts per bank.
The camshafts are driven via a chain trans-
mission. The engine is equipped with a
turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pres-
sure from both banks of cylinders.
To obtain optimum performance, fuel con-
sumption and low emission levels the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 203
engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous
Variable Cam Phasing). This means that
the engine’s intake camshafts can be
adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.
The switches are hydraulic.
Saab Trionic engine
Emission control
systems
Thesystemsforcontrollingemissionstothe
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
management system, 4-cyl
engine
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label in the engine bay.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
These engine familiesmeet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand
are equipped with the following systems:
WARNING
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position.
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
• sequential multiport fuel injection system
• three way catalytic converter
• crankcase emissions control system
• evaporative emission system.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Car care
By processing all of this information, the
ME9 system can control fuel injector open-
ingduration,ignitiontiming,intakecamshaft
phasingandturbochargerboostpressureto
provideexcellentengineperformancewhile
maintaining low emissions and fuel con-
sumption.
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
NOTICE
Allhydrocarbons formed whenrefueling will
be recovered by the car and not released
into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-
ter. When the engine is subsequently
started,theevaporativeemissioncanisteris
gradually purged as air is sucked into it
through a shut-off valve. The hydrocar-
bon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
page 157.
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the
TrionicECMhasdetectedaproblem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a workshop as
soon as possible. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
The ME9 engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the ME9
ECMhasdetectedaproblem. Thecar will
continue to operate, but performance
maybediminished.Youshouldhaveyour
car checked by a workshop as soon as
possible. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked 3 times.
Bosch ME9 engine management
system, V6 engine
The Bosch ME9 engine management
system is a system that combines sequen-
tial multiport fuel injection, electronic distrib-
utorless ignition and turbocharger boost
pressure control into one system and intake
camshaft phasing control.
The ME9 engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
• Charge air pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position.
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 205
Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
1 Oil filler cap
2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4 Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Power-steering fluid reservoir
8 Engine-oil dipstick
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Car care
Engine bay, V6 engine
1 Power-steering fluid resrvoir
2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4 Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Oil filler cap
8 Engine-oil dipstick
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 207
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level regularly.
1 Park the car on a level ground.
2 Switch off the engine and wait for
2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
normal operating temperature.
3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
a clean rag before carrying out the
check.
The level must not be below the MIN mark
on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
result in abnormal oil consumption.
Oil filler cap and dipstick, 4-cyl engine
Oil filler cap and dipstick, V6 engine
4-cyl engine: The engine oil level is
checked each time the engine is started. If
the oil level is low, the following message
appears on the SID:
V6 engine: The engine has an oil level
sensor that checks the oil level when the
engine is running. If the oil level drops too
low, the following message appears on the
SID:
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).
NOTICE
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Too high oil level can damage the engine.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
If this occurs the oil level must be checked
first. If the level is too low then it must be
topped up.
If this occurs the oil level must be checked
first. If the level is too low then it must be
topped up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Car care
Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
properly after topping up the oil to avoid
running problems.
NOTICE
WARNING
• Do not run the engine with the oil level
too low.
It is normal for an engine to consume a cer-
tain amount of oil. It is therefore often nec-
essary to top up the oil between services.
Check the engine oil level regularly.
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible.
• Change engine oil and oil filter in
accordance with the service
programme
During the Break-in Period (approx.
• Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil con-
sumption may be higher than normal.
• Only use the recommended type of oil.
Observe the above three points to avoid
serious damage to the engine.
For oil volumes and grades, refer to
page 284.
NOTICE
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently if the car is
being used under certain conditions, see
page 275.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engineasthiscouldcauseafire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil into the ground or down
a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
oil filters at an appropriate disposal
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 209
The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and
anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
coolingeffect. Lower concentrations should
be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
Air filter
Coolant
WARNING
WARNING
Coolants of a different brand could damage
the engine or cooling system. We therefore
recommend strict use of coolants that have
been approved by Saab.
To ensure reliable operation, only use
an air filter recommended by Saab
Automobile AB.
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
NOTICE
Transmission fluid
If the cooling system needs topping up,
mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
quantity of drinking water or distilled
water before adding it to the system.
Manual transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
enginecouldstillfreezeandbedamaged.
This is because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the ther-
mostat has opened to allow full circula-
tion.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
Automatic transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
There is an overpressure in the cooling sys-
tem. Coolant temperatures can sometimes
exceed 212° F (100° C).
Note:
If the coolant level drops too low, the follow-
ing message appears on the SID:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
The properties of the coolant are retained
for the entire service life of the car. There-
fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-
ant.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Car care
Coolant expansion tank, 4-cyl engine
Coolant expansion tank, V6 engine
Level markings, V6 engine
1 HOT
2 COLD
4-cyl engine: The expansion tank is trans-
parent to facilitate checking the coolant
level.
V6 engine: The expansion tank is not trans-
parent. The cap must be unscrewed so that
the coolant level can be checked. When the
cap is screwed off there are two level mark-
ings, HOT and COLD.
Whentheengineiscold, thecoolantshalllie
on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on
the expansion tank (boundary between the
upper and lower sections of the tank, see
illustration).
Whentheengineiscold, thecoolantshalllie
on or just above the COLD mark in the
expansion tank.
Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
Saab-approved concentrated coolant and
clean water. We recommend that you con-
tact an authorised Saab workshop.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine until warm so that
the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
again, as necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 211
If the level drops too low, the following
message appears on the SID:
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed
regularly, as specified in the service
program.
Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
container.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Brake fluid reservoir
Checking
Brake fluid should be changed according to
the service program. Refer to the Warranty
and Service Book.
NOTICE
If the brake fluid should require chang-
ing, this must be carried out at a Saab
dealer. We recommend that you contact
a Saab dealer.
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans-
parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.
The fluid level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks.
The foot brake and parking brake are self-
adjusting.
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal
pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
the brake pads are worn and need replac-
ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
be checked regularly, as specified in the
service program.
Brake pads should only be changed at a
workshop. We recommend that you con-
tact a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Car care
Power steering
WARNING
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
Check the levelof thepowersteeringfluidin
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point directly forwards
during this check.
Power steering fluid reservoir, 4-cyl
engine
Power steering fluid reservoir, V6 engine
Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
down the cap completely and then remove
it again.
The oil level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-
tures the level will be higher.
Top up with CHF 11S or CHF 202 power
steering fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 213
If frequent short journeys are made, the
battery may need extra charging. This can
be done with a battery charger or by taking
the car for a long run.
Battery
WARNING
If the battery is not being charged while the
engine is running, the following message
will appear on the SID:
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the
battery.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Check the drive belt (see page 216). If the
belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
the battery may not be charged and the A/C
compressor may not work.
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte level.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Check thechargestateandelectrolytelevel
of the battery regularly.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling
NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe
stored away from sub-zero temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Car care
Always connect the positive (red) cable to
the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
both battery leads when boost charging the
battery.
NOTICE
• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 198.
• Do not connect the battery termi-
nals, + and –, incorrectly.
Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
unlock the battery cover.
Battery bracket
• Serious damagecanoccur to the car’s
electricalsystem ifabattery oralterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
• Exercise special care when removing
and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
not to damage the battery disconnect
switch.
A car with standard equipment specifica-
tions and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
may only be sufficient for about 15 days.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 215
Battery disconnect switch 3
WARNING
If the battery disconnect switch has
tripped, do not reset it until you have visu-
ally inspected the car’s electrical system.
If there are visible signs of damage, have
the car checked at a workshop before
resetting the disconnect switch. We
recommend that you contact an author-
ised Saab workshop.
Battery disconnect switch with reset
button
A collision could cause a short circuit in the
alternator or starter motor. A disconnect
switchbythebattery’spositiveterminalcuts
offthebatteryfromthealternatorandstarter
motor when the airbags and seatbelt pre-
tensioners are detonated.
NOTICE
Exercisespecialcarewhenremovingand
fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to
damage the battery disconnect switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
Car care
Drive belt
WARNING
• Keephands and clothingclearofdrive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting the drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
Drive belt, 4-cyl engine
Drive belt, V6 engine
NOTICE
A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
result in:
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
• no charge to the battery
• no A/C compressor function.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine. It is driven by a
poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 217
Wipers and washers
Wiper blades
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
is particularly important if the car has been
through an automatic car wash, as these
sometimes leave a wax coating on the wind-
shield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Change of wiper blades, windshield
Change of wiper blades, rear window,
SportCombi
Windshield
Rear window, SportCombi
1 Press in the catch (1).
1 Detach the blade from the arm by press-
ing on the mounting for the blade from
below.
2 Fit the new blade by pressing the shaft
of the blade into the arm's mounting.
2 Pull the complete wiper blade down-
wards so that it comes away from the
wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
from the arm.
The washer jet, which is located next to the
high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Car care
Washers
WARNING
Takecare not tospillwasher fluidconcen-
trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
concentrate can contain flammable ingre-
dients such as alcohol.
The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.
(5.8 litres).
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
Washer fluid reservoir
Washer jets
The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Headlight washers are only available on
certain markets.
Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
as recommended by the table on
the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
page 102).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
Car care
Wrong bulb fitted
Autochecking of lights
Changing bulbs
If a low or main beam bulb of too high a
ratingis fitted, abulbfailuremessage willbe
shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
can damage the reflector).
The bulbs that are most important from the
point of view of traffic safety are monitored
bythecar’s electricalsystem. Ifoneofthese
bulbs should fail, a message will be dis-
played on the SID.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine
bay, switch off the engine to avoid the
danger of fingers and hands being
injured by moving parts.
Ifthefollowingmessageisdisplayedbutthe
bulb shines, it is most likely that an incorrect
bulb has been fitted.
Example of SID message:
Theradiatorfancancutinevenwhenthe
engine is switched off.
Left low beam failure.
Right high beam failure.
The following bulbs are not checked: park-
ing lights, front fog lights, reversing lights,
license plate lighting, side marker lights and
side direction indicators.
Note:
NOTICE
When changing bulbs, fit the same type
of bulb (e.g. Long-Life) as that removed.
Switch off the ignition before changing a
bulb, to avoid possible short-circuiting.
SportCombi
Headlight aiming, page 269.
The tail lights and brake lights consist of
LEDs. Ifapprox. 3/4oftheLEDsononeside
are broken then this is indicated in the SID.
If a stop light bulb fails
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
bulb when possible.
All rear light bulbs are of the same type and
rated21 W,withtheexceptionofthelicense
plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 220
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic
levelling. The levelling system is comprised
of two sensors, one on the front suspension
and one on the rear suspension, and a
control unit by the engine bay fuse box.
Headlight alignment is adjusted automati-
cally to the car’s load to prevent dazzling
drivers in oncoming traffic.
Xenon headlight, low beam 3
WARNING
Xenon headlights are high tension. All
work on xenon headlights, including
changing bulbs, must be carried out by
dealer personnel.
If a fault is detected in the system, the fol-
lowing message will be displayed on the
SID:
Xenon headlights produce roughly two
times as much light as halogen bulbs and
have a significantly longer service life.
We recommend you to contact a Saab
dealer to have a xenon headlight changed
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge
lamp containing xenon. When the lights are
switched on a very high voltage activates
the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full
intensity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
Car care
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the low beam bulb
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Low beam, halogen
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 240.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 222
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the high beam bulb
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
High beam, halogen
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 240.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 223
Both sides:
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
headlight.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-
light.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Parking lights
Front turn signal bulbs
The parking light bulb is located in the same
reflector as the main beam bulb.
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Car care
Both sides:
Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it.
2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
rear end can be pulled out.
2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
Change the bulb.
3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
edge of the opening. Then press in the
front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 225
1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
Lower the air shield.
2 Remove the protective cover. Release
the two spring clips securing the bulb.
3 Unplug the connector.
4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
The height of the beam can be adjusted
using a screwdriver inserted through the
hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.
Front fog lights 3
WARNING
Side marker lights
1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
part can be pulled out.
2 Fit the new bulb.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
3 When refitting, make sure that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge of the bumper trim.
• Refer to the information on jacks on
pages 257 and 258.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Car care
Taillights, Sport Sedan
1 Turn signals
Taillights, Convertible
1 Turn signals
Taillights, SportCombi
1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the
adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
bulb when possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 227
Stop lights, taillights and turn
signal bulbs, Sport Sedan
Stop lights, taillights and turn
signal bulbs, Convertible
Turn signals, reversing light and
rear fog light, SportCombi
1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the
lights.
Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet
by depressing the centre no more than
3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet
and pull it out. Refer also to page 228.
1 Remove the cover.
1 Remove the cover.
2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a
bayonet fitting.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder and cover.
2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken
bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet
fitting.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover.
2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
that secures the bulb holder.
3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
holder home so that the plastic lug
snaps into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Car care
Changing bulbs
Reversing lights and rear fog
light, Sport Sedan
Removing the trunk lid trim
Reversing lights and rear fog
lights, Convertible
Removing the trunk lid trim
1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb
holder.
2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
1 Remove the two screws securing the
grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.
2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the center of each rivet. Pull out the
rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.
1 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the centre of each rivet no more than
3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold
of the rivet’s collar.
3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so
that it snaps into place.
To refit the trunk lid trim
You can use the button on the handle of the
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
the rivets.
1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
You can use the button on the handle of the
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
the rivets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 229
Changing bulbs
Dome light, front, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the guide lugs onthe front edgeof
the lens and press the lens home.
Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
and SportCombi
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both sides of the front edge.
1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a
bayonet fitting.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Refit the bulb holder.
2 Fit the new bulb.
To refit the trunk lid trim
1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
Car care
Hatch opened for replacement of centre
bulb
Reverse side of the light fitting. The
arrows mark the outer bulbs
Dome light, Convertible
1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
fitting.
2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
out of the bulb holder.
Ifoneoftheouterbulbsneedsreplacing,
turn the light fitting round. Change the
bulb from the reverse of the lighting
fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
and press the fitting up towards the
windscreen rail.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 231
License plate lighting
Glove box lighting 3
Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lens.
1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
screwdriver.
The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
shelf.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
correctly seated.
4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
screws.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
one end.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Car care
Trunk lighting, Convertible
Trunk lighting, SportCombi
Courtesy/floor lighting 3
1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.
2 Change the bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it
out at the front.
2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in
the holder.
3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the
lamp housing and then pressing in the
rear edge.
1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
using a screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-
ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
Car care
Bulb table
No. Designation Watt-
age
1
2
3
H7
55 Headlight
H3
55 Front fog lights 3
P21W
21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
reversing lights
4
5
PY21W
R10W
21 Direction indicator, front/rear
10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy
lighting 3; glove box lighting; trunk
lighting, Convertible
6
R5W
5
License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
Sport Sedan
7
8
T4W
4
5
Reading light, rear
WY5W/W5W
Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
parking lights; front dome lighting
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Car care
The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
small unit in front of battery) and one on the
left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
end of the dash.
Fuses
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following should be heeded:
• We recommend that you allways
consult an Saab dealer before modify-
ing or adding any electrical equip-
ment. Failure to do so can result in the
electrical system being damaged.
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
fuse has blown.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating than specified (see
page 236). The color of the fuse indi-
cates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked without
delay. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 235
Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
connected to the car’s electrical system.
MAXI fuses
The car also has a number of large fuses
known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
to protect the car’s electrical system from
being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
number of electrical circuits and functions
and therefore has a higher rating (amper-
age) than the standard fuses. No spare
MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.
NOTICE
Ifa MAXI fuseblows, there is amajor fault
in the electrical system. Have the car
checked. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
Fuse panel in end of dash
Aspecialtoolforremovingfusesisprovided
on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
squeeze and remove the fuse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 236
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
15
10
20
30
5
Interior lighting incl. glove box
Accessories
Amplifier 2, Sound System 3
Control module in driver’s door
Passenger Sensing System
-
-
-
-
-
-
7.5 Headlight levelling switch 3
7.5 Hands-free 3; brake light switch; manual climate
control 3; clutch pedal switch
22
23
24
25
26
30
40
Cigarette lighter 3
Fuse panel in end of fascia
Cabin fan
No. Amp. Function
7.5 Airbag control module
1
2
3
4
15
5
Steering wheel lock
-
-
Steering column unit; ignition switch
Hands-free 3
®
5
Yaw sensor (cars with ESP )
-
10
10
27
-
Main instrument unit; automatic climate control
(ACC) 3
5
7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
(automatic transmission)
6
7
7.5 Brake light switch
20
Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
Control module in passenger front door
Dash fuse panel
8
30
10
30
9
10
Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage com-
partment between seats 3
11
10
Data link connection (diagnostics)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
Car care
Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side
No. Amp. Function
1–5 MAXI -
6
7
8
9
30 Control module in left rear door
30 Control module in right rear door
20 Trailer 3
-
-
10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail-
light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
trailer lights
11
12
13
14
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3
Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan
16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3
17
7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror 3; rain sensor 3
18 15 Moonroof 3
19
20
21
-
-
7.5 XM-radio 3, TMC-tuner 3
7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA) 3; control module in
rear doors; dome light (Convertible)
22 30 Radio 3; navigation 3
23
-
-
24 10 Movement sensor 3; tilt sensor 3; dome light (Con-
vertible)
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 238
26 30 Right-handstoplight;rearleftturnsignal;lefttaillight;
rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate light-
ing; trunk lighting; trailer lights
27 10 Convertible:Lumbarsupport,electricallyadjustable
front seat 3
28 15 Telematics 3
29
-
-
Trunk fuse panel, Convertible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
239
Car care
13
14
-
-
-
-
15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
16 30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
front left fog light 3
17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed
18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed
19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater 3
20 10 Headlight levelling 3
21
22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield
23
-
-
Fuse panel in engine bay
-
-
No. Amp. Function
24 20 Flash-to-pass
1
2
-
-
25 20 Amplifier, sound system II 3
10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con-
26 30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
trol module 3
fog light 3; right low beam; left high beam
3
4
5
6
20 Horn
27 MAXI
–37
10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch 3
-
-
10 Selector lever, automatic transmission 3; clutch pedal
switch
7
8
-
5
-
-
Relay for vacuumpump (brake system) 3
9
-
-
-
10
11
-
-
12 10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 240
Relays
R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
R 2 -
R 3 -
R 4 -
R 5 Flash-to-pass
R 6 Horn
R 7 -
R 8 Starter motor
R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
R11 Ignition +15
Fuse panel in front of battery 3
R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
R13 -
No. Amp. Function
1
2
-
Air pump, secondary air 3
R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
R15 -
20
Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
probe)
3
4
10
30
A/C compressor
Main relay
R16 -
Relays
1 -
2 A/C-compressor
3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 241
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 292).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
4 psi(28 kPa). When thetemperatureof the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 2 psi (14 kPa).
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires
The Tire-Loading Information label shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi-
cle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
underinflation or overinflation is all
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
WARNING
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Poor maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
• Bad fuel economy
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an blow-out
and a serious accident. See “” on
page 251.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resultingaccidentcouldcauseserious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
If your tires have too much air (overinfla-
tion), you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recom-
mended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
yourtreadisbadlyworn, or if yourtires
have been damaged, replace them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Car care
If you’ll be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is
legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the
maximum inflation pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), which-
ever is lower. See the example below.
When you end this high-speed driving,
return to the cold inflation pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See on page 251.
High speed operation
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require infla-
tion pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be
drivenathighspeeds, makesurethetires
are rated for high speed operation, in
excellent condition, and set to the correct
cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.
Example:
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 10,000 miles
(16 000 km).
You’ll find maximum load and inflation pres-
sure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters near the rim flange. It will read some-
thing like this: Maximum load 690 kg
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 243 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 247 for more infor-
mation.
(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press
For this example, you would set theinflation
pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi
(244 kPa).
When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Thepurposeofregularrotationistoachieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-
cle. The first rotation is the most important.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
ontheTire-LoadingInformationlabel. Make
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 243
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-
ened. See page 258.
Flat spotting
When It Is Time for New Tires
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
havecooleddown, aflatspotcanforminthe
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
to checkthe treadwear indicators, which will
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
page 257.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
thatexperiencedwhen the wheels needbal-
ancing.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If
the outdoor temperature is low it takes a
longer distance.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Car care
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
Before changing to wheels/tires of another
size, we recommend that you contact an
authorised Saab workshop regarding
acceptable options. See also page 290
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
Treadwear indicator
Treadwear indicators
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32"(1.6 mm)oftreadremains.Assoonas
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 245
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
NOTICE
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
WARNING
Wide wheels andtires with sidewalls that
are too low can:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes or types (radial and bias-
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all
wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was devel-
oped for use on your vehicle. See
• be damaged in potholes, etc.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
to be overloaded.
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-
form Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-
duction tires.
• affect the function of the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP ).
®
The speed and load limits of the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 250.
“Compact spare” on page 254.
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).
WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
with respecttothesegrades, they mustalso
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Car care
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall per-
formance.
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
ThetemperaturegradesareA(thehighest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to thegenerationofheat andits ability todis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-
ing one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. Warn-
ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 247
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cool-
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-
cle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Used Replacement Wheels
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
WARNING
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.
See “Changing a tire” on page 257.
WARNING
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheelboltsorwheelnuts, replacethemonly
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Alwaysusethecorrect wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Car care
Notice: If your vehicle does not have
235/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suit-
able snow chains. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chainmanufacturer’sinstructions.Ifyou
can hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
ifyoushouldeverhavea“blowout”, hereare
a few tips about what to expect and what to
do:
WARNING
If your vehicle has 235/45 R17 size tires,
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
othervehicleparts.Theareadamagedby
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-
tain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
Itmaybeverybumpyandnoisy,butyoucan
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 249
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on the performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance. For more information see “Uniform
Tire Quality Grading” on page 245.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a partic-
ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-
struction type and service description.
215 / 55
R
16 93
H
Maximum ColdInflation Load Limit: Max-
imum load that can be carried and the max-
imum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pres-
sure see “Recommended lowest tire pres-
sure, cold tires” on page 292 and “” on
page 251.
|
|
|
|
|
|
f
a
b
c
d
e
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
a Tire Width
b Aspect Ratio
c Belt Rating
d Rim diameter
e Load range
f Speed rating
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-
ters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-
cates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Car care
Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-
cates the tire height-to-width measure-
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tration, it would meanthat the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
Speed ratings
Q Tire approved for speeds up to
100 mph (160 km/h)
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)
225 Tire section width, mm
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-
struction; and the letter “B” means belted-
bias ply construction.
45 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
as a percentage of the section
width
R Radial ply
17 Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
seats
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
94 Tire load index
H Speed rating
Load range:Theload range representsthe
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Tire load indices
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
95 Max. 1521 lbs. (690 kg)
97 Max. 1609 lbs. (730 kg)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 251
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tirepressingoutwardoneachsquareinchof
the tire. Air pressure is expressedinpounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the com-
bined weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
This label can only be found on vehicles
sold in the U.S.
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
information label in the glove box, see
page 293.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-
forcing materials.
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, andincludestheweight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-
installed options.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
ColdInflationPressure: Theamount ofair
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire has built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241.
Curb weight: This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Car care
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-
meric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
and date of production.
Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi-
cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-
tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 241 and
“” on page 251.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-
cle capacity weight; and production options
weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see “”
on page 251.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Normal occupant weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “” on
page 251.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “” on page 281.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the rear axle, see “” on page 251.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-
ing positions.
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
thatfacesoutwardwhen mountedona vehi-
cle. Theside of the tire that contains a white-
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-
turer, brand and or model name molding on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 243.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 253
Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
placard.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Substract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
dards, a tire information system that pro-
vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-
ings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The
rating are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 245.
VehicleCapacityWeight:Isthenumber of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “” on page 251.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “” on page 251.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Car care
The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
Winter tires
Compact spare
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Foldthecarpetingforwardtoeaseaccessto
the tools and spare tire.
WARNING
The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
must be removed when changing the light
bulb in the trunk lid (see page 228).
The spare tire or punctured tire must be
stowedunder thetrunkfloor, andsecured
in place with the retaining nut.
Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
and you can use its “Speed warning” func-
tion, to monitor driving speed since you
must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h), see
page 90.
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted whena standardtire hassus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).
Winter tires normally use a different speed
ratingcomparedtosummer/allseasontires.
Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
rating on the tires you use.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
Tire date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
The tire pressure should be 60 psi
(420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible.
Tires havea code thatspecifiestheir dateof
manufacture. The first two digits denote the
weeknumberandthelasttwodigitstheyear
followed by a filled triangle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 255
life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
(approx. 3,500 km).
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Tools under a panel in the trunk
Driving with a compact wheel
fitted
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
WARNING
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
punctured tire, this can be temporarily
placed outside up in the spare wheel well
but only while driving to the closest work-
shop.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
tire can overheat affecting the car’s
roadholding.
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan
one compact spare tire at a time.
• Avoid driving against the curb.
• Do not use snow chains.
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
conceal the warning text.
• Tire pressure: refer to page 290.
• The spare tire or punctured tire must
be stowed under the trunk floor, and
secured in place with the retaining nut.
As ageneral rule, all heavy loads must be
well secured in the trunk (see page 139).
Observe the following when the compact
spare tire is fitted:
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing a tire.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Car care
SportCombi
SportCombi with subwoofer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 257
Changing a tire
To beeven more certain the vehiclewon't
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
• The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown
forward and cause personal injury in
the event of a crash or if the car rolls
over.
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for chang-
ing a flat tire.
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a tire or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to
support the car during repair work
or servicing.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threadsofthewheelboltsifthecarhas
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are being installed, the
bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
should be cleaned before the thinner
steel wheels are fitted. It may other-
wise not be possible to achieve the
correct clamping force, despite tight-
ening the wheel bolts to the correct
torque.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they couldbebadly injured or evenkilled.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
• Raising your vehicle too high or with
the jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even make
thevehiclefall. Tohelpavoidpersonal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
locationbeforeraisingthevehicle,and
raise the vehicle only far enough off
thegroundsothereisenoughroomfor
the spare tire to fit (no more than
1 Set the parking brake firmly.
2 If you have an automatic transmis-
sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
For a manual transmission, leave the
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
the ground and the bottom of the tire).
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Car care
When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
be positioned at one of the four jacking
points (front or rear) under the sill members.
If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
be positioned under the normal jacking
points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
under this.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Marking of jacking points
Jacking points
1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the jacking point.
Each jacking point is indicated by an
arrow on the sill (see illustration).
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the jacking point in the underside of the
sillmemberandthattheentirefootofthe
jack is steady and flat on the ground.
The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
similar.
2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
cover.
If, none the less, you wish to remove the
wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
and pull it straight out.
Remove the plastic wheel bolt covers.
Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
theground. Removethewheelboltsand
lift off the wheel.
4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
wheel hub.
5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
before fitting, see page 260. Fit the
wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequenceshownonpage 260(opposite
pairs).
Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
the car.
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
page 260.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Refit the plastic wheel bolt covers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 259
Jacking points for floor jack
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc.
Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
hub.
NOTICE
7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
or so miles.
• Do not overtighten the bolts using a
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
We advise against using wheels with large
ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-
ponents are then more exposed to slush,
road salt and grit.
• When refitting a wheel cover, make
sure that the valve protrudes through
the marked recess in the wheel cover.
If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
speedometer can be reprogrammed to
ensure it is as accurate as possible. We rec-
ommend that you contact a Saab dealer.
Driving with tire chains 3, see page 186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
Car care
Safety belts
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
door armrests and headlining, use a
vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other asso-
ciated components must be inspected.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the centre to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belts yourself. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer dealer.
Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin
layer of grease
Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
thin oil, must be removed at once with an
absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-
ling. Then clean with a stain remover.
Check the function of the safety belts regu-
larly as follows:
• Holdthediagonalstrapand pull it sharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
White spirit is recommended for removing
grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
may also be used.
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
should be replaced.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-
cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
warm water and a detergent or have them
replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 261
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
Textile carpeting
Textile carpeting should be vacuum
cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
cleanedusinga brush or spongeandcarpet
shampoo.
Washing
The bodywork must be washed frequently.
When the car is new, the body should be
washed by hand using plain cold water and
a clean, soft brush through which the water
flows. Automatic caresses should be
avoided when the car is new.
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
the patina resulting from use is often consid-
ered desirable in leather. But if the leather is
allowed to becometoo grubby, itcan startto
look shabby.
For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
are not earthed (grounded) must not be
used out of doors.
After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
detergent can be added to the water, which
should be lukewarm.
Engine bay
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
the dirt.
The leather upholstery should be cleaned
and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc-
tion with spring and autumn inspections. In
very warm, dry climates the leather may
need more regular reconditioning. Use con-
ventional leather care products. Follow the
instructions on the packaging.
The engine bay should be cleaned with an
engine decreasing and rinsed with hot
water. The headlights must be covered
over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid
spraying electrical components and con-
nectors.
Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
the paintwork.
Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol-
vent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally-friendly decrescendos.
Donotuse harshpolishingagents, cleaning
agents, sprays, coarse soap or hot water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Car care
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of the car by hand if the car is
usually washed in an automatic car wash
without special facilities for underbody
cleaning.
Convertible:
NOTICE
• If a pressure washer is used be heedful of
the following recommendations:
• on the lower part of the car (not higher
than the door handles): max pressure
of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.
(20 cm).
• on the upper part of the car: tax pres-
sure of 100 bar and not closer than
32 in. (80 cm).
• Do not use any drying chemicals or water-
proofing agents.
Donotusealcohol-basedcleanersonthe
plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
these can cause a crackling effect on the
lenses.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
The door mirrors should be folded in
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Wet brake discs reduce the performance
of the brakes.
Clean the inside of window glass using a
proprietary window cleaner. This is particu-
larly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
• Avoid automatic car washes.
Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
phone, must be removed if the car goes
through an automatic car wash.
WARNING
Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
to prevent misting.
• Read and follow the instructions on
the packaging of the recommended
cleaning agents and waterproofing
agents. We recommend that you
contact an authorised Saab workshop
regarding recommended cleaning
agents and waterproofing agents.
Cars with Saab Parking Assistance: Do
not spray the sensors or closer than 8 in.
(20 cm) to the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
washer fluid. This is especially important if
the car has been washed in an automatic
car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
used that can contaminate the windshield
and impair the performance of the wipers.
• Never treat the soft top with hot wax or
similar.
In theU.S., Saaboffersa fullcomplement of
car care products. See your dealer or visit
us at www.saabcatalog.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 263
When the soft top is only slightly soiled,
follow the directions on the cleaning agent
packaging. No brushing is necessary.
4 Movethewashingbrushbackwardsand
forwards, not diagonally, from side to
side or in circles. Use a soft brush, like a
clothes brush or a micro fibre cloth so
that the cleaning agent foams. Never
use a wire brush.
5 Then rinse the soft top with warm water
and brush using a soft brush in the direc-
tion of the vehicle until all foam has
disappeared. Brush carefully to prevent
damaging the material.
• Never use petrochemical based
solvents for cleaning. Only use water
with a recommended cleaning agent.
Petrochemical based solvents can
cause irreparable damage to the soft
top.
Check the soft top for water penetration
from time to time by spraying a small
amount of water on it. If water does not form
droplets but disappear into the material, it is
recommended to wash normally and then
waterproof.
• Never use a pressure washer to clean
the soft top. Only use normal house-
hold water pressure.
If the soft top is heavily soiled and normal
recommended cleaning does not produce a
noticeable improvement, carry out the follo-
wing.
NOTICE
WARNING
• Only operate the soft top when it is
clean and dry.
Thefollowingcleaningmethodmustbeonly
usedifthesofttopisheavilysoiledandmust
not be carried out more than twice a year.
Waterhotter than37°C canburntheskin,
causeskinirritationand/orcauseinjuries.
Use suitable protection.
• Do not lower the soft top when it is
damp. This can cause folds and pres-
sure marks. If the soft top is heavily
soiled, the dirt may cause irreparable
visible chafe marks.
1 Stop normal cleaning.
6 Dry the soft top using a clean chamois
leather or a cloth that does not leave lint
on the soft top.
7 Allow the soft top to dry fully. Touch with
a hand after a while, if the material feels
damp, allow it to dry for longer.
2 Rinse off the thick dirt thoroughly with
water.
3 Spray the newly rinsed soft top with the
recommendedcleaningagentandallow
it to work in for 15-20 minutes.
• Only use water, recommended clea-
ning agents and a microfibre cloth if
the soft top is already damaged, other-
wise the damage can become worse.
• At creases, seams and window edges
the cleaning motion should be away
from the crease, seam or window
edge in to the soft top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
Car care
8 If spots are still visible, repeat the treat-
ment on these spots as before. Press
lightly with the brush to prevent damag-
ing the material. Do not use the brush
excessively. This can irreparably
damage the material. Do not repeat the
treatment more than twice.
If corrosion has already set in, such as the
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
Waxing and polishing
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to dull through oxidation. Other than
in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive
polishescontainingacuttingagentonanew
car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
waxing or polishing.
9 When the soft top has fully dried, it must
be waterproofed immediately. Only use
the recommended waterproofing agent.
Follow the instructions on the packa-
ging.
10 To obtain even and optimum water-
proofing, the car must be closed for
24 hours after treatment. Do not touch
the material and do not place any
objects on it.
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin
layers of topcoat until the surface of the
repaired area is flush with the surrounding
paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Touching up the paint
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-
corrosionwarrantydoesnotcovercorrosion
resulting from untreated defects.
Two-coat enamel
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Then apply the primer, base color and
finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
best finish, apply two or three coats of
primer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 265
Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
prevent the onset of corrosion.
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car undergoes a series of anti-
corrosion processes during production.
These include electrophoretic priming,
PVC-based coatingtoprotect againststone
chip damage and corrosion, and treatment
of body cavities and members with thin,
penetrating rustproofing oil.
Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
expired, it makes good sense to continue to
maintain the rustproofing.
Seams in the body, especially those in the
doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera-
ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by
grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
ofcondensation. Keeptheseams cleanand
at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen-
etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
dealer will be pleased to give you further
advice.
In addition, most body panels, such as the
hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
prone to damage. This applies particularly
to the underside of the car and inside the
wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
like that are thrown up can give rise to cor-
rosion where the underseal has worn away.
The extent of this obviously depends on the
conditions in which the car is used.
Surface treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
7 Clear enamel 45 µm
Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
underside of the car often and to inspect the
condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-
sionwarrantydoesnotrelievethecarowner
oftheneedtocarryoutnormalmaintenance
to the rustproofing and to make good any
damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
Car care
• Sponge the car with a solution of either a
good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
the spring.
What causes rust?
Preventive maintenance
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish.
Body panels may rust throughif theprocess
is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
water is trapped or where the car’s panels
are continuously damp.
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Performa-
tion Limited Warranty described in the war-
ranty booklet.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse
conditions, where there is a rapid
buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
your car at least once a week. After
extreme exposure to salted snow or
slush, evidenced by a white film on the
car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
washing will prevent paint damage from
acid rain and other airborne contami-
nants such as tree sap and bird drop-
pings. If any of these contaminants are
noticed on the car the finish should be
washed immediately.
Damage to paint and undercoating by
stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-
ately exposes metal to air and moisture.
Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
Areasofthecountrywithhighhumidityhave
a greater potential for rust problems, espe-
cially where salt is used on roads or there is
moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
may also damage paint and promote rust-
ing.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosenandflush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 267
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairs promptly. After washing or
after heavy rain, check for leaks. When
washing the car inspect body surfaces
for paint damage. While checking for
leaks, lift the floor mats and check
underneath them. Water can collect in
these areas and remain for prolonged
periods. Dry any wet areas including the
floor mats. Have leaks repaired as soon
as possible.
Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
necessary. Pay particular attention to the
fenders and wheel housings, which are
exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
the composition has worn or flaked off, the
steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
may run off or fall off when dry.
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
Information on the scrapping and recycling
of car materials is available on
www.saab.com.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratchesorminorfinishdamage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damageshouldberepairedimmediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibilityandarenot coveredunder
warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Car care
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
NOTICE
Air conditioning (A/C)
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked at a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
WARNING
Do not use a pressure washer when
cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
the risk of damage.
• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
system must be carried out at a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
Note:
• The A/Csystemispressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• The compressor drive belt should be
inspected under the regular service
program.
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-
tion that forms on the evaporator is drained
off under the car. When the car is parked,
this may result in a small puddle forming on
the ground. The warmer the air and the
higher the relative humidity, the more con-
densation will be produced.
• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
other personal injury.
• Clean away dirt and insects from the
condenser and radiator to prevent clog-
ging. Whenwashing the car, usethehose
to spray the radiator and condenser
(located in front of the radiator) from both
sides (both from the front of the car and
from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
pressure washer.
NOTICE
Inadequate cooling
a Check that the condenser (in front of the
radiator) has not become clogged with
dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the compressor drive
belt does not slip (see page 216).
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
Caution: Do not hose down the radia-
tor and condenser while the engine is
hot.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor (see page 236).
• Never mix R 134a with other refriger-
ants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 269
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
Headlight aiming
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improveyourabilitytoseethebeamofthe
low beam headlight being aimed.
An optical headlamp aimer can also be
used and will than replace the wall.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled
andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should not have any snow,
ice or mud attached to it.
WARNING
• Applicable to the manual climate control
system - During cold months the air condi-
tioning should be switched on once or
twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
during highway driving once the engine is
warm.
This action saves the gaskets in the
compressor from being spoiled. The
compressor uses a lubricant that circu-
lates with the coolant.
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
dangerof fingers andhandsbeinginjured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
Note:
The A/C system cannot be switched on
whentheoutsidetemperatureisbelow32°F
(0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
always have the A/C button pressed in. The
A/C system will then cut in automatically
when the outside temperature is high
enough.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas
described in the following procedure.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Car care
Vertical aiming device
1 Wall or garage door.
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
5 Cars with xenon lights:
Xenon lights with automatic headlight
levelling system must first do a refer-
encerunbeforeaiming:Starttheengine
and let the headlights do a reference
run. Turn off the engine but leave the low
beam on.
1 Aiming marker on headlight lens
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming devices there are two vertical
aiming devices which shall be turned
simultaneously and the same amount of
turns.
Cars with halogen lights:
Turn on the low beam headlights.
Both variants:
Placeapieceofcardboardorequivalent
(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto
the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded
distance (see point 4) and draw a hori-
zontal line the width of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 271
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up that may cause
damage to the headlight.
6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
simultaneously in the same direction
indicated on the headlight until the hori-
zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
with the horizontal line on the wall.
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
Correctly adjusted low beam
7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
lens of the optical headlight aimer
device at the intersection of the two
markers on the headlight lens.
Thenfollowtheinstructionsintheoptical
headlight aimer instruction manual and
point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
Car care
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 273
Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule __ 274
Owner assistance ______ 276
Reporting Safety Defects
(USA) _______________ 277
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government__________ 277
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders ___________ 278
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Customer Assistance and Information
TIME FOR MAIN SERVICE
SERVICE INTERVALS
Atimeforservicemessagewillilluminateon
theSaabInstrumentDisplay(SID)whenthe
car is due for regular maintenance.
Maintenance schedule
will be set when additional maintenance is
necessary, such as air filter or spark plug
replacement. When the message Time for
service. is displayed, contact your Saab
Dealer for a service appointment.
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always a good practice!
Time for service.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
in a timely manner may result in serious
damage to key components or systems.
There are three different messages that will
appear:
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections. This mes-
sage is set by the engine management
system which calculates service intervals
based on several factors including driving
habits, ambient temperature, number of
coldstarts,mileagedrivenandelapsedtime
since the last service. If mileage accumula-
tiondoesnotoccur, themessagewillbeset,
and maintenance required at a maximum of
1 year.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour
best choice.
TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections and addi-
tionalmaintenancesuchasairfilter orspark
plug replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 275
Engine oil and filter changes
Service record retention
Service costs
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the “Techni-
cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
The use of extra additives in the oil is not
necessary and is not recommended, and
may be harmful to turbochargers.
It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser-
vice records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-
cated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to docu-
ment that all necessary maintenance has
been done.
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
coveredunder an applicable Saabwarranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA-
NIZED
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
any of the following conditions:
The service record is comprised of a series
of coupons on which to record services as
they are performed. There are additional
coupons for documenting extra engine oil
and filter changes, extra automatic trans-
mission fluid services necessary for severe
service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
• Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling
(frequent stop-and-go traffic).
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
location.
HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
COUPONS
• Most trips are through dusty areas (such
as construction zones).
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
When thecar is brought toa Saab dealer for
scheduled maintenance, present the War-
ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-
vice manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
responsible for quality assurance at the
dealership will also sign and stamp the
record with the dealer identification stamp.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services. Theseconditions
cause the engine oil to break down faster.
The Warranties and Service Record Book-
let has provisions to record extra oil
changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Customer Assistance and Information
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Service information
Owner assistance
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
your dealer. These are comprehensive
manuals on CD rom, geared to use by pro-
fessional technicians. Consult your Saab
dealer for prices for your model.
Warranties and service problem
assistance
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 277
Reporting Safety
Defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
800-263-1999.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the toll-
free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-
4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153; go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehi-
cle safety from http:// www safercar.gov.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Customer Assistance and Information
To read this information, special equipment
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-
puter systems that monitor and control sev-
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicleuses on-board vehicle comput-
erstomonitoremissioncontrolcomponents
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-
cult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR).
Saab will not access information about a
crasheventor share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, withtheconsentof
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
• use the data for Saab research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
tained and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
tions for research purposes.
In a crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
information about the condition of the vehi-
cle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application,
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
wheelangle, lateralacceleration,safetybelt
usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-
mance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehi-
cle crash performance and may be used to
improve crash performance of future vehi-
cles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-
board systems do not record sounds, such
as conversation of vehicle occupants.
Others, suchaslawenforcement, mayhave
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
please check the OnStar® subscription ser-
vice agreement or manual for information
on its operations and data collection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 279
Technical data
General data __________ 280
Engine _______________ 283
Engine oil_____________ 284
Fuel__________________ 285
Engines ______________ 286
Electrical system_______ 286
Drive belt _____________ 287
Manual transmission ___ 287
Automatic transmission_ 288
Suspension ___________ 288
Steering ______________ 288
Brake system__________ 289
Wheels and tires _______ 290
Plates and labels_______ 293
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Technical data
General data
Overall length, including bumpers: ______
Sport Sedan and Convertible _________ 182.5'' (4635 mm)
SportCombi_______________________ 183.2'' (4654 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors_____ 80.2'' (2038 mm)
Maximum height ____________________ 60.6'' (1539 mm)
Wheelbase ________________________ 105.3'' (2675 mm)
Track:
V.I.N. label on vehi-
cles sold in U.S.A.
V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in
Canada
Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
registration documents.
Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1524 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)
Trunk length, Sport Sedan:
Ground clearance at GVW ____________ approx. 4.7''
(120 mm)
Rear seat raised___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)
Rear seat lowered _________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)
Trunk length, Convertible _____________ 29.1" (740 mm)
Trunk length, SportCombi:
Number of seats (incl. driver):
Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________
Convertible _______________________
Turning circle:
5
4
Rear seat raised___________________ 39.9'' (1013 mm)
Rear seat lowered _________________ 70.0'' (1777 mm)
Trunk volume (VDA):
Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 39.0 ft. (11.9 m)
Sport Sedan ______________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
Convertible, soft top raised___________ 12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
Convertible, soft top folded___________ 8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)
SportCombi ______________________ 14.8 cu.ft. (419 l)
SportCombi with rear seat lowered ____ 45.0 cu.ft. (1273 l)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 281
Curb weight
(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res-
ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel):
Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi___________________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
Maximum load in trunk, Sport Sedan, Con-
vertible and SportCombi_____________ 175 lbs. (80 kg)
Sport Sedan ______________________ 3210–3570 lbs.
(1455–1620 kg)
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed:
Convertible _______________________ 3510–3840 lbs.
(1590–1740 kg)
Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 926 lbs. (420 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 776 lbs. (352 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ 3300–3690 lbs.
(1495–1675 kg)
Maximum combined weight of driver and
passengers ______________________
Gross vehicle weight (GVW):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 4140–4510 lbs.
(1880–2045 kg)
Sport Sedan and SportCombi (5x150 lbs.) 750 lbs. (340 kg)
Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________ 600 lbs. (272 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 4350–4620 lbs.
(1975–2095 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ 4230–4630 lbs.
(1920–2100 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
SportCombi, front __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
SportCombi, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Weight distribution:
Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi approx. 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear, Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi ___________________________ approx. 50/50 %
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Technical data
Trailer:
WARNING
Trailer with brakes___________________ Max. 3500 lbs.
(1588 kg)
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
Trailer without brakes ________________ Max. 1000 lbs.
(450 kg)
Recommended towball load ___________ 110–165 lbs.
• When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
folded down.
(50–75 kg)
See also page 190.
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
with brakes _______________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer National restrictions
without brakes ____________________ apply
Whentowing atrailer, increasethe pressure
of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 188).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 283
Engine
Idling speed _______________________ 720 rpm.
When the engine
load increases, e.g.
thesteeringwheelis
turned, the idling
speed is raised to
900 rpm.
Type:
4-cyl engine ______________________ Four cylinders,
double overhead
camshafts,
16 valves, two
balancer shafts
Antifreeze _________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
V6 engine ________________________ Six cylinders,
4 overhead cam-
shafts, 24 valves,
the angle between
the cylinder rows is
60°
Coolant capacity:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 9.5 qts. (9.0 l)
Cylinder bore:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 3.504'' (89 mm)
Stroke:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 2.945'' (74.8 mm)
Swept volume:
4-cyl engine ______________________ 122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 170 cu.in. (2.792 l)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Technical data
Engine oil
Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils ap-
proved for your engine. Service should be done according to
the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to ne-
glecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all en-
gines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by
Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
Approved oils:
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil en-
gine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
selection.
For all gasoline engines - fully synthetic engine oil - approved
against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity SAE 0W-
30 or 0W-40. To benefit from Saab´s specified service intervals,
pleasure ensure to select a fully synthetic engine oil approved
against GM-LL-A025.
Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM
specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marked as
synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your
engines specific requirements. Please ensure only to use fully
synthetic oils approved against your engines specific require-
ments, i.e. GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-
40.
For optimum performence Saab recommends the use of Saab
Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car For-
mula, but other fully synthetic oils approved against the above
specification and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40
may also be used.
Recommended oil viscosities.
Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various
temperatures, according to the SAE standard. The thickness in-
fluences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For op-
timum performance Saab recommends:
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 285
Fuel
Extra engine oil additives.
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
you will need for good engine performance and protection.
Fuel tank capacity________________ 16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)
When to change engine oil.
For optimum performance Saab recom- Gasoline engines –
mends: _______________________ AON 90.
Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving condi-
tions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
considerably.
Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
For further information on fuel, see page 159.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
When the message for service is displayed you need to have
the required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service in-
dicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)
4-cyl engine ______________________ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
V6 engine ________________________ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
Technical data
Engines
Electrical system
2.0T Ecopower
Voltage ___________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ____________________ 60 Ah
Starter motor:
Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 210 hp (155 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500-4000 rpm 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1
4-cyl engine ______________________ 1.8 kW
V6 engine ________________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating:
2.8 V6 (250) Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800-4500 rpm 257 ft.lb. (350 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 10.0:1
4-cyl engine with manual gearbox _____ 120 A/14 V
4-cyl engine with automatic gearbox ___ 140 A/14 V
V6 engine ________________________ 155 A/14 V
Firing order ________________________
4-cyl engine ______________________ 1-3-4-2
V6 engine ________________________ 1-2-3-4-5-6
Spark plugs:
4-cyl engine
Type ____________________________ NGK PFR6T-10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
V6 engine
Type ____________________________ PLFR6C 10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 287
Drive belt
Manual transmission
Outside length______________________
Type _____________________________ Fully synchronized
with final drive gear
and differential
4-cyl engine ______________________ 40.472'' (1028 mm)
V6 engine ________________________ 83.463'' (2120 mm)
Oil type (for topping up)_______________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity:
5-speed _________________________ 1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
level plug
6-speed, 2.8 V6 ___________________ 3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (5th gear) ____________________ 27–30 (43–48)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (6th gear) ____________________ 29–35 (46–56)
Drive belt, 4-cyl engine
Drive belt, V6 engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Technical data
Automatic transmission
Suspension
Type:
Spring type, front and rear ____________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
5-speed__________________________ Electronically con-
trolled, 5-speed,
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter,planetary
gears and integral
final drive.
Front ____________________________ 7.0'' (178 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 8.3'' (212 mm)
Dampers, front and rear ______________ Oil and gas-filled
twin-tube
Lock-up function in
selector positions3,
4 and 5.
Steering
Steering __________________________ Power-assisted
steering gear of
rack-piniontypeand
telescopic jointed
steering column
6-speed__________________________ Electronically-
controlled,6-speed,
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter,planetary
gears and integral
Number of turns, lock to lock___________ 2.97
Oil type ___________________________ Power steering fluid
final drive.
CHF 11S or
CHF 202
Lock-up function for
1st to 6th gear.
Selector lever positions _______________ P, R, N, D, M
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
5-speed__________________________ 18–31 (29–49)
6-speed__________________________ 33–41 (53–66)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 289
Brake system
Disc diameter:
Front ____________________________ 11.22 in.
(285 mm) **)
Front 3 *) ________________________ 11.81 in.
(300 mm) **)
Foot brake (ABS)____________________ Hydraulic disc
brakes with vacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels (some
variants also have
ventilated rear
Rear ____________________________ 10.94 in. (278 mm)
Rear 3 *) ________________________ 11.42 in.
(290 mm) **)
discs).EBDfunction
(see page 171).
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Front 3 __________________________ 9.61 in.² (62 cm²)
Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
Park brake_________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid _________________________ To DOT 4.
Do not use DOT 5.
*)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
must not be fitted to these variants since
the diameter of the brake discs does not
allow this.
**) ventilated
Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible
Oil capacity_______________________ 0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
Oil type __________________________ CHF 11S
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290
Technical data
Wheels and tires
All season tires
Spare wheel 3
6.5 x 16" _________________________ 215/55 R16 97 H
RF/XL
Compact spare:
Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 125/85 R16 99 M
Pressure_________________________ 420 kPa (60 psi)
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94V
Summer tires
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 W
Maximum life _____________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Before changing to wheels/tires of another size, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorised Saab workshop regarding
acceptable options.
Maximum speed___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Spare wheel 3
Winter (snow) tires:
6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
M+S
Full size spare
Wheel ___________________________ 6.5 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 215/55 R16
Pressure_________________________ 250 kPa (36 psi)
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q
M+S
Maximum life _____________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 291
Recommended tire/engine combinations
NOTICE
2.0 Turbo V6 engine
Snow chains:
All season tires
215/55 R16 97 H RF/XL
235/45 R17 94 V
Summer tires
235/45 R17 94 W
Winter (snow) tires
215/55 R16 93 Q
235/45 R17 94 Q
Wheel sizes
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
x
x
–
x
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels
Tires
6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
–
x
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
x
x
x
x
Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".
6.5 x 16"
x
x
–
x
NOTICE
7.5 x 17"
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
page 245.
RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.
Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
17" wheels.
Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292
Technical data
Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size
Load/speed
mph (km/h)
Front
Rear
* Do not exceed posted speed limits.
*
psi/kPa psi/kPa
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the sur-
rounding air temperature.
All season tires
The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
(20°C).
215/55 R16 97 H
RF/XL
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 41/280
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 41/280
Thetirepressurewillincreaseasthetiresbecomewarm(e.g.during
highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
235/45 R17 94 V
When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
by 2 psi/10 kPa.
Summer tires
235/45 R17 94 W
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 41/280 41/280
Winter tires
215/55 R16 93 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 41/280 41/280
235/45 R17 94Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 36/250 36/250
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 42/290 42/290
Compact spare 3
125/85 R16 99 M
Max 50 (80)
60/420 60/420
Spare wheel 3
215/55 R16 93V
When the car has the same tire size, the
same load/speed information applies as for
the original tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 293
Plates and labels
When contacting your Saab dealer it may
sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
numbers.
1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside wind-
shield
2 Gearbox number
3 Engine number
4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
body). Tire information label can be found
on the B-pillar. See also page 251.
Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body)
5 Certification label
6 Chassis number (stamped on body).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294
Technical data
Position:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 7 1 016584
cation number:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2 3 4 5 6
= identification codes for certain chassis components
1
2
3
4
5
Region ________
Country _______
Manufacturer ___
Product line ____
Model series ___
Y = Northern Europe
S = Sweden
6
7
Body version ___
Gearbox _______
4 = 4-door
7 = Convertible
5 = 5-door
3 = Saab Automobile AB
F = 9-3
5 = 5-speed manual
6 = 6-speed manual
9 = 5-speed automatic
1 = 6-speed automatic
B = 9-3 Linear
D = 9-3 Arc
F = 9-3 Aero
8
9
Engine variant __
Check digit_____
Y = 2.0 Turbo
U = V6 engine
0-9 or X
10 Model year ____
11 Factory _______
7 = 2007
1 = Trollhättan
6 = Graz
12 Serial number __
000001-999999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 295
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
Several of the systems in your
Saab canbe customized to better
suit your individual needs.
Contact your Saab dealer
• The length of time the lights are on.
• Whether the reversing light or tail lights
should come on as well as the dipped
beam.
Central locking system
Automatic Climate System (ACC)
• Convertible: A/C compressor not
switched off when the soft top is open.
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
We recommend that you consult a Saab
dealer for further information.
Listed below are a number of examples of
programmable functions.
• Audibleconfirmationof arming/disarming
the car alarm.
• Automatic unlocking when car stopped
and remote control removed from the igni-
tion switch.
• Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
30 s after being shut.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296
Technical data
Warning and indications that can
be shown on the SID
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Which warnings and indications that can be
shown depends on engine variant and car
specification.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Hot engine. Make a
safe stop. Idle engine.
Symbol Text
Number of keys:
Active key number:
Airbag malfunction.
Contact service.
Antilock brake malfunc.
Contact service.
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Pull out key, turn
steering wheel. Restart.
Gearbox too hot. Make a
safe stop. Open hood.
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Release park brake.
Alarm tripped during
last arming period.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Rear left seat
backrest unlocked.
Tap brakes lightly
before using cruise ctrl.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Rear right seat
backrest unlocked.
Traction control failure.
Contact service.
Reduced engine power.
Contact service.
Parking assistance
malfunction. Service.
Stability control failure.
Contact service.
Limited performance.
Parking assistance
sensor interference.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 297
Right front turn signal
failure.
Left rear taillight
failure.
Close doors.
Right rear turn signal
failure.
Right rear taillight
failure.
Left brake light failure
Left high beam failure.
Left low beam failure.
Rear fog light failure.
Right brake light failure.
Right high beam failure.
Right low beam failure.
Right side-mounted
turn signal failure.
Time for service.
Left side-mounted
turn signal failure.
Left front position
light failure.
Right front position
light failure.
Left front fog light
failure.
Right front fog light
failure.
High mounted stop
light failure.
Left reversing light
failure.
Left front turn signal
failure.
Right reversing light
failure.
Left rear turn signal
failure.
License plate light
failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298
Technical data
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 299
Brakes ________________________ 172
Braking _______________________ 172
Bulb changing __________________ 221
Bulb table _____________________ 235
Buying new tires ________________ 246
Cigarette lighter _________________ 136
Cleaning the engine bay __________ 263
Cleaning upholstery ______________ 262
Closing the soft top manually,
Convertible ____________________ 70
Closing the soft top, Convertible _____ 66
Clutch interlock _________________ 164
Comfort opening of moonroof ______ 131
Comfort opening of windows,
Index
A
ABS brakes ____________________ 173
ACC _________________________ 107
Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 120
Air filter _______________________ 211
Airbag _________________________ 32
Anchorage eyes, Sport Sedan _____ 141
Anti-corrosion treatment __________ 267
Antilock braking system __________ 173
Anti-spin ______________________ 175
Ashtrays ______________________ 136
Autochecking of lights, warning and
C
Cabin lighting, Convertible _________ 80
Cabin lighting, Sport Sedan and
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 121
Compact spare _________________ 256
Compact spare wheel fitted, driving
SportCombi ___________________ 133
Calibrating front electric windows
with pinch protection _____________ 80
Calibration of windows, Sport Sedan
with _________________________ 257
Compass ______________________ 129
Convertible _____________________ 63
Convertible, washing _____________ 264
Coolant _______________________ 211
Crash memory, see EDR _________ 278
Cruise control __________________ 171
Cup holder _____________________ 134
and SportCombi _______________ 123
Car alarm ______________________ 58
Car transport ___________________ 199
Care of air conditioning ___________ 270
Cargo guard ___________________ 150
Cargo guard, SportWagon ________ 150
Cargo net, SportCombi ___________ 147
Change of address notification _____ 276
Changing a tire _________________ 259
Changing bulbs _________________ 221
Changing the battery, remote control _ 56
Changing wiper blades ___________ 219
Checking the number of remote
indicator lights __________________ 89
Autodimming _______________ 125, 126
Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 107
Automatic closing of moonroof _____ 131
Automatic closing of windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 122
Automatic transmission ___________ 165
D
Date codes, tires ________________ 256
Deactivating rear windows,
B
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 123
Deactivating the passenger door
window button, Convertible ________ 79
Deactivating the rear window
switches _____________________ 123
Deep water, driving through _______ 196
Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 253
Battery _______________________ 215
Bedding-in of new brake pads _____ 163
Before towing a trailer ____________ 193
Belt height, Sport Sedan and
controls _______________________ 55
Checks before towing a trailer _____ 193
Child safety _____________________ 24
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 54
Child seats _____________________ 24
SportCombi ____________________ 14
Brake fluid, grade _______________ 289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300
Index
Determining correct load, tires _____ 255
Direction indicator stalk switch _____ 101
Direction indicators ______________ 101
Dome light, Convertible __________ 232
Dome light, Sport Sedan __________ 231
Donor battery, boost starting ______ 200
Door handles ___________________ 50
Door mirrors ___________________ 124
Drive belt ______________________ 218
Drive belt, length ________________ 287
Driver’s seat with memory _________ 21
Driving at night _________________ 197
Driving in cold climates ___________ 187
Driving in deep water ____________ 196
Driving in hot climates ____________ 189
Driving techniques ______________ 185
Driving with a compact wheel fitted _ 257
Driving with a heavy load on hilly
Electric windows, Convertible _______ 79
Electrical system, technical data ____ 286
Electrically adjustable seats ________ 20
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) __ 177
Electronic steering wheel lock ______ 154
Emergency opening of the narrow
Flat spots, tires _________________ 245
Floor jack ______________________ 260
Folding down the rear seat
backrest, SportCombi ___________ 143
Folding down the rear seat,
Sport Sedan __________________ 138
Front fog lights __________________ 101
Front towing eye ________________ 197
Fuel container __________________ 161
Fuel gauge _____________________ 91
Fuel grade _____________________ 285
Fuel information _________________ 161
Functions, car alarm ______________ 60
Fuse panel in luggage compartment _ 239
Fuse table _____________________ 238
Fuses _________________________ 236
backrest, Sport Sedan __________ 142
Emergency operation of the
moonroof _____________________ 132
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 263
Engine heater __________________ 186
Engine immobilizer _______________ 57
Engine management system ______ 205
Engine number _________________ 293
Engine oil, checking _____________ 209
Engine oil, grade ________________ 284
Engine oil, volume _______________ 285
Engine temperature gauge _________ 90
Engine, description ______________ 204
Engine, technical data ____________ 283
Engines _______________________ 286
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 278
Extra electrical socket ____________ 136
G
roads ________________________ 167
Driving with a load ______________ 196
Driving with a roof load ___________ 194
Driving with the trunk lid open ______ 196
GDO, garage door opener _________ 126
Gearbox number ________________ 293
General safety instructions,
Convertible ____________________ 64
Glove box _____________________ 136
Glovebox lighting ________________ 233
E
F
EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 278
ESP, anti-skid system ____________ 177
Easy entry, Convertible ____________ 75
Economical motoring ____________ 185
Electric engine heater ____________ 186
Electric heating, front seats _______ 114
Electric windows ________________ 121
Facilitating entry to rear seat,
H
Convertible ____________________ 75
Factors affecting fuel consumption __ 185
Filler cap ______________________ 160
Filling a portable fuel container _____ 161
Filling up ______________________ 159
Handbrake _____________________ 179
Hazard warning lights ____________ 102
Head restraint, Convertible _________ 76
Head restraints __________________ 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 301
Headlight flasher ________________ 100
Headlight levelling ________________ 99
Headlights ______________________ 99
Hood _________________________ 204
Horn _________________________ 120
Horn button ____________________ 120
Luggage compartment lighting,
changing _____________________ 233
K
Key ___________________________ 50
Kick-down _____________________ 166
M
MAXI fuses ____________________ 237
Main instrument panel _____________ 84
Main/dipped beam _______________ 100
Maintenance schedule ___________ 274
Manual gear selection ____________ 170
Manual gearbox _________________ 164
Manual tripping of car alarm ________ 60
Materials used in the car,
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 25
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 251
Labels and plates, location ________ 293
Lashing eyes, Sport Sedan ________ 141
Lashing eyes, SportCombi ________ 146
Laying the car up _______________ 181
Leather upholstery, cleaning _______ 263
Lighting in luggage compartment,
I
If a tire goes flat ________________ 250
Ignition switch __________________ 152
Immobilizer _____________________ 57
Important considerations for driving _ 156
Important information, petrol-engined
reclamation ___________________ 269
Memory, driver’s seat _____________ 21
Messages on SID, Convertible ______ 73
Milometer _______________________ 92
Moonroof ______________________ 130
Mug holder ____________________ 134
cars with catalytic converters _____ 157
Indicator lights ___________________ 84
Inflation, tires __________________ 243
Information about fuel ____________ 161
Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 100
Interior lighting, Convertible ________ 80
Interior lighting, Sport Sedan and
SportCombi ___________________ 133
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 125
Intermittent malfunctioning, central
Convertible ____________________ 81
Limp-home ____________________ 157
Limp-home, automatic transmission _ 167
Load carriers, roof _______________ 194
Load indices, tires _______________ 252
Loading your vehicle _____________ 253
Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan ___ 140
Load-through hatch, SportCombi ___ 145
Locking a car with flat battery _______ 53
Locks __________________________ 50
Long-term parking _______________ 181
Luggage compartment ___________ 138
Luggage compartment lighting,
N
New tires, buying ________________ 246
Night driving ___________________ 197
Number plate lighting, changing ____ 233
locking _______________________ 52
J
O
Convertible ____________________ 81
Luggage compartment lighting,
Sport Sedan ______________134, 142
Jump starting __________________ 200
ORVR ________________________ 206
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 285
Opening handles _________________ 50
Opening the soft top, Convertible ____ 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302
Index
Outside mirrors _________________ 124
Owner assistance _______________ 276
Roof lighting, Sport Sedan and
R
SportCombi ___________________ 133
Roof lighting, changing ___________ 231
Running-in _____________________ 163
Rain sensor ____________________ 104
Raising the soft top manually,
P
Convertible ____________________ 70
Reading lights, Convertible _________ 80
Rear fog light ___________________ 101
Rear seat, folding down, SportCombi 143
Rear seat, safety belts ____________ 17
Rear seats, folding down,
Sport Sedan __________________ 138
Rear towing eye ________________ 198
Rear windows, deactivating,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 123
Rearview mirrors ________________ 124
Recommendations for automatic
transmission, towing a trailer _____ 191
Recommendations for manual
gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 192
Recommended snow chains _______ 290
Refueling ______________________ 159
Remote control __________________ 50
Remote locking malfunction ________ 52
Replacement, wheel _____________ 249
Reporting safety defects __________ 277
Rev counter _____________________ 89
Reversing lights ________________ 102
Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible ___ 78
Roof carriers, Sport Sedan and
Panic function, car alarm __________ 60
Park Brake Shift Lock ____________ 166
Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
S
SAHR, head restraint _____________ 23
SDM _________________________ 278
SID ___________________________ 91
SPA __________________________ 182
Saab Information Display __________ 91
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 182
Safety belts _____________________ 12
Safety belts, rear seat, Sport Sedan
override ______________________ 168
Parking _______________________ 179
Parking aid ____________________ 182
Parking brake __________________ 179
Parking on a hill ________________ 180
Pinch protection, electric windows,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi _____ 122
Pinch protection, moonroof ________ 132
Plates and labels, location ________ 293
Polishing and waxing ____________ 266
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 218
Portable fuel container ___________ 161
Position lights ___________________ 99
Power steering fluid, checking _____ 214
Power steering fluid, grade ________ 288
Pressure gauge _________________ 90
Pressure, tires __________________ 243
Profiles, customized settings _______ 96
and SportCombi ________________ 17
Seatbelts _______________________ 12
Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible ___ 77
Seatbelts, care _________________ 262
Seatbelts, checking ______________ 262
Seats __________________________ 18
Securing a load _________________ 141
Sentronic, manual gear selection ___ 170
Service costs ___________________ 275
Service information ______________ 276
Service intervals ________________ 274
Service record retention __________ 275
Signalling, horn _________________ 120
Ski hatch, Sport Sedan ___________ 140
Ski hatch, SportCombi ____________ 145
Spare wheel ___________________ 256
Speed ratings, tires ______________ 252
Q
SportCombi without roof rails _____ 194
Roof carriers, SportCombi with roof
rails _________________________ 195
Quality grading, tires _____________ 247
Quick guide, remote control ________ 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 303
Speedometer ___________________ 89
Starting the engine ______________ 154
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 120
Steering wheel lock ______________ 154
Steps for determining correct load
limit _________________________ 255
Storage compartments ___________ 136
Sun visor ______________________ 134
Switches _______________________ 99
Towing _______________________ 197
Towing a trailer _________________ 190
Towing the car _________________ 198
Traction Control System (TCS) _____ 175
Transmission oil, checking ________ 211
Transmission oil, grade ___________ 287
Transmission, automatic __________ 165
Transmission, manual ____________ 164
Transporting the car _____________ 199
Treadwear indicators ____________ 246
Trip computer ___________________ 92
Trip meter ______________________ 92
Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC _____ 269
Trunk lid, driving when open _______ 196
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 53
Turbo gauge ____________________ 90
W
Warning labels ____________________ 8
Warning lights ___________________ 84
Warning triangle ________________ 102
Warnings and messages on SID,
Convertible ____________________ 73
Washer fluid ___________________ 219
Washer jets ____________________ 220
Washers ______________________ 103
Washing ______________________ 263
Washing a Convertible ___________ 264
Waxing and polishing ____________ 266
Wear indicators, tires _____________ 246
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ______________________ 43
Wheel replacement ______________ 249
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 290
When it is time for new tires _______ 245
Windshield washers _____________ 103
Windshield wipers _______________ 103
Wing mirrors ___________________ 124
Winter driving __________________ 187
Winter tires ____________________ 256
Wiper blades ___________________ 219
Wipers ________________________ 103
T
TCS __________________________ 175
Technical data _________________ 280
Textile carpeting, cleaning ________ 263
Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan _______ 141
Tie down eyes, SportCombi _______ 146
Tightening torque, wheels _________ 261
Tire chains ____________________ 250
Tire date code __________________ 256
Tire inspection and rotation _______ 244
Tire markings __________________ 252
Tire sidewall labeling ____________ 251
Tire sizes _____________________ 290
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 253
Tire, changing __________________ 259
Tire, spare _____________________ 256
Tires _________________________ 243
Tools and spare wheel ___________ 256
Touching up paintwork ___________ 266
Towbar _______________________ 190
Towbar load ___________________ 192
U
Uniform tire quality grading ________ 247
Upholstery care _________________ 262
Upholstery, cleaning _____________ 262
Useful tips on night driving ________ 197
Useful tips on starting ____________ 155
V
Vanity mirror ___________________ 134
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 278
Vehicle identification number ______ 293
Vehicle recovery ________________ 199
X
Xenon headlights ________________ 222
Xenon headlights, head light levelling _ 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304
Notes
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|